Nextream - 4110-20

Head Office
17, rue du Petit Albi

BP 8244 tel +33 1 34 20 70 00
95801 Cergy Pontoise Cedex fax +33 1 34 20 70 47
FRANCE http://www.nextream-online.com
DBE 4110 DSNG ENCODER

(Release 7.0)
MPEG-2/DVB Encoder
USER MANUAL
47232437AK
This document and any updates and/or supplemental information, including any copies thereof, cannot © 2003
be reproduced, neither communicated to a third party, without written authorisation from NEXTREAM
NEXTREAM. All rights
reserved
BLANK PAGE
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS iii
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Please review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to
this product or any products connected to it.
CAUTION: These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other than that
contained in the Operating Instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer
all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Important Safety Precautions
Use Proper Power Cord Power cords are no longer shipped with the device.
You are recommended to use the cord described on
page 55.
Avoid Electric Overload Do not apply a mains voltage that is outside the
range specified in this manual.
Ground the Product This product is grounded through the power cord.
To avoid electric shock, the ground pin must be
correctly connected to the ground.
Before switching the device on, ensure that it is
properly grounded.
Do Not Operate Without To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not
Covers operate this product with cover panels or plates
removed.
Use Proper Fuse For continued protection against risk of fire, replace
only with same type and rating of fuse specified by
NEXTREAM.
Do Not Operate in To avoid electric shock, do not operate this product

Wet/Damp Conditions in wet or damp conditions.
47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110

June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual
iv GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Do Not Operate in To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this

Explosive Atmosphere product in an explosive atmosphere.
Maintenance To avoid electric shock, disconnect the mains power

supply before carrying out any maintenance
operations on the device.
Maintenance should be carried out by qualified
personnel.
Product Damage Precautions
Use Proper Power Do not operate this product from a power source
Source that applies more than the voltage specified.
Fitting If installing the device in a rack, observe the

installation instructions in the section Rack
installation page 53. Do not just secure the front
panel of the device in the rack, instead use L-
profiles as specified in the above-mentioned
section.
Dusty atmosphere As the device features no air filter, it must be

installed in a rack fitted with a filter if used in a
dusty environment.
This filter should be cleaned on a regular basis to
avoid any overheating.
Provide Proper Provide proper ventilation to prevent product

Ventilation overheating.
Do Not Operate With If you suspect there is damage to this product, have
Suspected Failures it inspected by qualified service personnel.
Replacing components Only use components from or approved by

NEXTREAM.
THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01

MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS v
Replacement of RAM This product includes a non volatile RAM with an

with in-built lithium in-built lithium battery which should never require
battery replacing.
If for any reason replacement does prove necessary,
please observe the following conditions:
. The operation must only be performed by
qualified personnel.
. Only replace with the same or equivalent memory
type.
CAUTION! Danger of explosion if memory is
incorrectly replaced.
. Ensure the memory is inserted the right way
round.
. Please dispose of dead memories according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Retain Original If equipment is returned to the Customer Service

Packaging Department, the faulty device must be packed
where possible in its original packaging (protective
corners and boxes). If you no longer have the
packaging, the faulty device must be protected
against shocks during transportation.
Our Customer Service Department examines
packaging on arrival and can refuse to carry out
repairs if the packaging has been visibly damaged
during transportation and this has led to further
damage in addition to the fault originally noted.
Transportation costs and risks for equipment returns
are borne by the Customer. Equipment should only
be returned with a return authorisation form
(provided at the end of this manual).

vi GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BLANK PAGE

USING THE MANUAL vii
USING THE MANUAL
Chapter 1 "Specifications" provides technical specifications and detailed

characteristics of the DBE 4110 DSNG Encoder.
Chapter 2 "Installation" explains the operations necessary on initial start up:

equipment installation, connection, switching on, installation of "Stand-alone"
supervision software for operation from a dedicated PC and installation of boards.
Chapter 3 "Front Panel Operation" presents the local supervision and

configuration mode which gives the DSNG operator full control of signal
transmission and compression parameters.
Chapter 4 "PC operation - Control & Command software" gives a description

of the "Stand-alone" software.
Chapter 5 "PC operation - Fast_DSNG software" gives a description of the

"Fast_DSNG" software especially designed for DSNG operators.
Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting" gives useful basic maintenance information which

will assist with connection problems and mains fuse inspection.
Chapter 7 "Customer Service" contains important contact information should

you require the services of the NEXTREAM Customer Service.
Chapter 8 "Abbreviations and Acroynms" contains a list of the principal

abbreviations and acronyms used in the manual along with their wording in full.

viii USING THE MANUAL
BLANK PAGE

CONTENTS ix
Contents
General Safety Instructions ................................................................................iii
Using the manual ................................................................................................vii
CHAPTER 1
SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 - Encoding system overview .............................................................................. 3
1.2 - DBE 4110 overview............................................................................................ 4
1.3 - Sales references ................................................................................................ 6
1.4 - Specifications .................................................................................................... 8

1.4.1 - Description of basic functions...................................................................... 8
1.4.1.1 - Video audio interface (SDI) .............................................................. 8
1.4.1.2 - De-embedded audio inputs .............................................................. 8
1.4.1.3 - Analogue audio inputs with 2 stereo audio ...................................... 9
1.4.1.4 - TS output ......................................................................................... 9
1.4.1.5 - Control and command interface ..................................................... 10
1.4.1.6 - MPEG-2 4:2:0MP@ML .................................................................. 12
1.4.1.7 - Audio encoder ................................................................................ 13
1.4.1.8 - SI/PSI management ....................................................................... 14
1.4.1.9 - Low delay mode ............................................................................. 14
1.4.1.10 - Private data .................................................................................. 15
1.4.1.11 - Stream Editing ............................................................................. 17
1.4.1.12 - VBI processing ............................................................................. 18
1.4.1.13 - COMPIN board ............................................................................ 23
1.4.2 - Description of optional functions ............................................................... 25
1.4.2.1 - ASI TS input (option)...................................................................... 25
1.4.2.2 - DVB Common Scr. (option) ........................................................... 27
1.4.2.3 - MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML (option) ........................................................ 28
1.4.2.4 - RS232 (option) ............................................................................... 29
1.4.2.5 - Ext. Modulator C&C (option) .......................................................... 30
1.4.2.6 - DPSN board (option)...................................................................... 31
1.4.2.7 - 4 stereo audios (option) ................................................................. 32
1.4.2.8 - 2 AES/EBU interfaces (option)....................................................... 34

x CONTENTS
1.4.2.9 - Int. modulator (option).................................................................... 35

1.4.2.10 - Alarm Relay Closure (option)....................................................... 36
1.4.2.11 - XLR adapter cord (option)............................................................ 37
1.4.2.12 - Source switching tolerance .......................................................... 37
1.4.3 - AC power supply ....................................................................................... 38
1.4.4 - Mechanical characteristics ........................................................................ 39
1.4.5 - Environmental specifications..................................................................... 42
1.4.6 - Equipment view ......................................................................................... 45
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
2.1 - Encoder installation ........................................................................................ 50

2.1.1 - Manual switch setting ................................................................................ 50
2.1.2 - Desktop installation ................................................................................... 53
2.1.3 - Rack installation ........................................................................................ 53
2.1.4 - Mains power supply and protective earth.................................................. 55
2.1.4.1 - Power supply ................................................................................. 55
2.1.4.2 - Connection to the techical earth .................................................... 56
2.1.4.3 - On/Off switch ................................................................................. 56
2.2 - Board connections.......................................................................................... 57

2.2.1 - SSEB board (slot 0)................................................................................... 58
2.2.2 - DPSN board (slot 1) .................................................................................. 65
2.2.3 - COMPIN board (slot 1).............................................................................. 66
2.2.4 - AMUSE board (slot 2) ............................................................................... 68
2.2.5 - ISMB board (slot 2) ................................................................................... 73
2.2.6 - ATADI board (slot 4).................................................................................. 75
2.2.7 - Alarm Relay Closure ................................................................................. 77
2.2.8 - Modulator Control&Command................................................................... 79
2.3 - Switching on the device ................................................................................. 80
2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input ........................................ 81

2.4.1 - DPSN board .............................................................................................. 81
2.4.2 - COMPIN board.......................................................................................... 82
2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software..................................................................... 84

2.5.1 - Scope ........................................................................................................ 84
2.5.2 - Installation ................................................................................................. 84
2.5.2.1 - Environment................................................................................... 84
2.5.2.2 - Interface language for the applications .......................................... 85

CONTENTS xi
2.5.2.3 - Setup procedure ............................................................................ 85

2.5.3 - Running the software ................................................................................ 95
2.6 - Installing optional boards............................................................................... 97

2.6.1 - Installing a board ....................................................................................... 97
2.6.2 - Removing the board .................................................................................. 98
2.7 - Installing software options ............................................................................. 99
CHAPTER 3
FRONT PANEL OPERATION
3.1 - Operating principle........................................................................................ 103
3.2 - Front panel overview..................................................................................... 104
3.3 - Welcome and main screens ......................................................................... 108
3.4 - Ergonomy....................................................................................................... 110

3.4.1 - Operating mode....................................................................................... 110
3.4.2 - Changing parameters ON AIR ................................................................ 112
3.5 - External modulator connection.................................................................... 113
3.6 - Menu tree........................................................................................................ 114
3.7 - Sections associated with the menu............................................................. 117
3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens...................................... 118

3.8.1 - Main screen ............................................................................................. 118
3.8.2 - TRANSMIT screen .................................................................................. 119
3.8.3 - PRESET screen ...................................................................................... 120
3.8.3.1 - PRESET / Recall screen .............................................................. 120
3.8.3.2 - PRESET / Store screen ............................................................... 122
3.8.3.3 - PRESET / Erase screen .............................................................. 123
3.8.4 - MOD.SETUP screen ............................................................................... 124
3.8.4.1 - MOD.SETUP / Tx O/P screen...................................................... 124
3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen ............................................................... 125
3.8.4.3 - MOD.SETUP / L-Band screen ..................................................... 126
3.8.4.4 - MOD.SETUP / Convolution screen .............................................. 127
3.8.4.5 - MOD.SETUP / Symbol_R screen ................................................ 127
3.8.4.6 - MOD.SETUP / Info/Bandwidth screen ......................................... 128
3.8.4.7 - MOD.SETUP / Roll_off screen..................................................... 129
3.8.4.8 - MOD.SETUP / Spectrum screen ................................................. 130
3.8.5 - ENC.O/P screen ...................................................................................... 130

xii CONTENTS
3.8.6 - ENCODING screen ................................................................................. 131

3.8.6.1 - ENCODING / Video screen.......................................................... 131
3.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen.......................................................... 133
3.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen ........................................................... 134
3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen............................................................................. 135
3.8.8 - ALARM screen ........................................................................................ 136
3.8.9 - OTHER screen ........................................................................................ 137
3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen ................................................................ 137
3.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen.............................................................. 138
3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen.................................. 138
3.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen .................................... 139
3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen................................................................. 141
3.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen .................................... 141
3.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen .............................. 141
3.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen .................................... 143
3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen ..................................... 143
3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen ...................................... 146
3.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen........................................ 148
CHAPTER 4
PC OPERATION - CONTROL & COMMAND SOFTWARE
4.1 - Ergonomic aspects ....................................................................................... 155

4.1.1 - Screen ..................................................................................................... 155
4.1.2 - Mouse...................................................................................................... 159
4.1.3 - Setting the interface language................................................................. 160
4.1.4 - On-line manuals ...................................................................................... 162
4.1.5 - Simulator mode ....................................................................................... 163
4.1.5.1 - Activation of simulator mode........................................................ 163
4.1.5.2 - Simulation of options.................................................................... 164
4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking ......................................................................... 165
4.2 - Running software .......................................................................................... 168
4.3 - {Equipment Interface} application ............................................................... 170
4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application ........................................................... 173

4.4.1 - Purpose and scope of the application ..................................................... 173
4.4.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 174
4.4.3 - Declaring the device................................................................................ 175
4.4.4 - Cancelling/validating device installation changes ................................... 179
4.4.4.1 - Cancelling changes to device installation .................................... 179

CONTENTS xiii
4.4.4.2 - Validating changes to device installation ..................................... 180

4.4.5 - Additional device installation commands................................................. 181
4.4.5.1 - Remove a device ......................................................................... 181
4.4.5.2 - Change device name and address .............................................. 181
4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application......................................................... 184

4.5.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 186
4.5.3 - Device parameters .................................................................................. 189
4.5.3.1 - Encoder operating parameters (advanced parameters) .............. 189
4.5.3.1.1 - “General” item ................................................................ 192
4.5.3.1.2 - “Output” item .................................................................. 194
4.5.3.1.3 - “Encoders” item.............................................................. 196
4.5.3.1.4 - “Data injection” item ....................................................... 199
4.5.3.1.5 - “Scrambler” item ............................................................ 200
4.5.3.1.6 - “SAM card” item ............................................................. 201
4.5.3.1.7 - “Access control” item ..................................................... 202
4.5.3.1.8 - “SIMS” item .................................................................... 203
4.5.3.1.9 - “Time” item..................................................................... 204
4.5.3.1.10 - “TBS Signalling” item ................................................... 206
4.5.3.1.11 - “ISO Signalling” item .................................................... 208
4.5.3.1.12 - “DVB Signalling” item................................................... 209
4.5.3.1.13 - “PSIP Signalling” item .................................................. 211
4.5.3.2 - Modulator parameters .................................................................. 212
4.5.3.3 - NIT table ...................................................................................... 215
4.5.3.3.1 - Edit the NIT .................................................................... 215
4.5.3.3.2 - Changing descriptors ..................................................... 219
4.5.3.3.3 - Deleting descriptors ....................................................... 219
4.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT .................................................... 220
4.5.3.4 - TOT table ..................................................................................... 223
4.5.3.4.1 - Edit the TOT................................................................... 223
4.5.3.4.2 - Changing descriptors ..................................................... 227
4.5.3.4.3 - Deleting descriptors ....................................................... 227
4.5.3.5 - Saving/Loading a device configuration ........................................ 228
4.5.3.6 - Archived configurations................................................................ 230
4.5.3.7 - Cancelling/Validating changes ..................................................... 235
4.5.3.8 - Device locking / unlocking............................................................ 237
4.5.4 - Generated Services................................................................................. 238
4.5.4.1 - TV service .................................................................................... 239
4.5.4.1.1 - Editing parameters of the video component .................. 243
4.5.4.1.2 - Editing parameters of the audio component .................. 255
4.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component ..................... 264
4.5.4.1.4 - Editing parameters of the data component .................... 271
4.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors............................................................. 283

xiv CONTENTS
4.5.4.1.6 - SDT descriptors ............................................................. 289

4.5.4.2 - Advanced Functions .................................................................... 290
4.5.4.2.1 - Shared components....................................................... 290
4.5.4.2.2 - Ghost components......................................................... 291
4.5.4.2.3 - Inband command ........................................................... 293
4.5.5 - TS input ................................................................................................... 293
4.5.5.1 - First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input........................ 298
4.5.5.2 - Second level filtering: filtering conditions on the tributary,
selecting services and EMM flows ................................................ 298
4.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributary ................... 298
4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services ...................................................... 303
4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows ................................................. 306
4.5.5.3 - Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services...................... 309
4.5.5.3.1 - General filtering conditions ............................................ 309
4.5.5.3.2 - Individual filtering of components .................................. 312
4.5.5.3.3 - Attaching components ................................................... 316
4.5.5.3.4 - Removing a service ....................................................... 321
4.5.5.4 - Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components ............. 322
4.5.5.4.1 - General filtering conditions ............................................ 322
4.5.5.4.2 - Removing a component ................................................. 324
4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application .................................................... 326

4.6.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 327
4.6.3 - Alarm supervision.................................................................................... 334
4.6.3.1 - Alarms window............................................................................. 334
4.6.3.2 - Equipment window....................................................................... 338
4.6.4 - Supervision of services and data flow ..................................................... 340
4.6.5 - Save all/Load all commands ................................................................... 343
4.6.6 - Maintenance commands ......................................................................... 344
4.6.7 - Audible warning of alarms ....................................................................... 350
4.7 - {Download} application ............................................................................... 351

4.7.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 351
4.7.3 - Procedure................................................................................................ 353
4.7.3.1 - Before downloading ..................................................................... 353
4.7.3.2 - Downloading ................................................................................ 358
4.7.3.3 - After downloading ........................................................................ 359
4.7.4 - Additional commands .............................................................................. 360
4.8 - {Event Log} application ............................................................................... 362

4.8.1 - Principles of the {Event Log} application ................................................. 362
4.8.1.1 - Event............................................................................................ 362

CONTENTS xv
4.8.1.2 - View configuration functions ........................................................ 363

4.8.1.3 - Event exporting ............................................................................ 363
4.8.1.4 - Miscellaneous .............................................................................. 364
4.8.2 - Screen layout .......................................................................................... 364
4.8.3 - Commands .............................................................................................. 368
4.8.3.1 - Commands for opening an event log file ..................................... 368
4.8.3.2 - Command for exporting in text format.......................................... 369
4.8.3.3 - Display commands....................................................................... 371
4.8.3.4 - Calculation commands................................................................. 376
4.9 - {Alarm Help} application............................................................................... 379

4.9.1 - Scope ...................................................................................................... 379
4.9.2 - Features .................................................................................................. 379
4.9.2.1 - Extended description of alarms.................................................... 379
4.9.2.2 - Print capability.............................................................................. 380
4.9.2.3 - Search engine .............................................................................. 380
4.9.2.4 - Navigation tool ............................................................................. 380
4.9.2.5 - Synchronisation with the {Monitoring & Redundancy}
and {Event Log} applications.......................................................... 380
4.9.2.6 - Synchronisation with other applications ....................................... 380
4.9.2.7 - User defined comments ............................................................... 380
4.9.2.8 - French/English versions............................................................... 381
4.9.2.9 - Customisation of display .............................................................. 381
4.9.2.10 - Summary of alarms .................................................................... 381
4.9.2.11 - Help / About ............................................................................... 381
4.9.3 - Access to the {Alarm help} application .................................................... 382
4.9.3.1 - Access via the {Monitoring &Redundancy} application ................ 382
4.9.3.2 - Access via the {Event Log} application ........................................ 382
4.9.3.3 - Access via any application ........................................................... 383
4.9.4 - User Interface (main window and commands) ........................................ 384
4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application..................................... 390

4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application .................................................................. 390
4.10.2 - IP Settings ............................................................................................. 396
4.10.3 - Parameter definitions ............................................................................ 397
4.10.3.1 - Video bidir .................................................................................. 397
4.10.3.2 - Audio stream type ...................................................................... 397
4.10.3.3 - LTW_offset................................................................................. 398
4.10.3.4 - SPE (SuperEncoder) switch source mode................................. 398
4.10.3.5 - VBI stream type ......................................................................... 398
4.10.3.6 - LDSChurch mode ...................................................................... 398
4.10.3.7 - ABSAT mode ............................................................................. 399
4.10.3.8 - Multichoice-D1 mode ................................................................. 399
4.10.3.9 - Foxtel 6dB uplift ......................................................................... 400

xvi CONTENTS
4.10.3.10 - Closed Caption type................................................................. 401

4.10.3.11 - Extended-data insertion (line 284) ........................................... 401
CHAPTER 5
PC OPERATION - FAST_DSNG SOFTWARE
5.1 - Fast-DSNG ..................................................................................................... 405
5.2 - Software presentation................................................................................... 407
5.3 - Interfaces ....................................................................................................... 410

5.3.1 - Encoder interface .................................................................................... 410
5.3.2 - Modulator/up-converter interface ............................................................ 410
5.3.3 - Graphic interface ..................................................................................... 410
5.4 - Functions ....................................................................................................... 411

5.4.1 - Modulator configuration........................................................................... 411
5.4.2 - Encoder configuration ............................................................................. 411
5.4.3 - Supervision.............................................................................................. 411
5.5 - Operation ....................................................................................................... 413

5.5.1 - General principles ................................................................................... 413
5.5.2 - Setup panel ............................................................................................. 414
5.5.3 - Transmission panel ................................................................................. 416
5.5.3.1 - Transmission parameters ............................................................ 417
5.5.3.2 - Parameters linked to encoder control and signal content ............ 419
5.5.4 - Alarms panel ........................................................................................... 426
5.5.5 - Scrambling panel..................................................................................... 427
5.5.6 - Information panel..................................................................................... 429
5.5.7 - Preset panel ............................................................................................ 430
5.5.8 - Dynamic behaviour.................................................................................. 432
5.5.8.1 - No connection .............................................................................. 432
5.5.8.2 - Setting up a connection ............................................................... 432
CHAPTER 6
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 - Device connection problems ....................................................................... 436
6.2 - Inspecting the power supply fuse ............................................................... 437
6.3 - Miscellaneous problems............................................................................... 438

CONTENTS xvii
6.3.1 - Fan life expectancy ................................................................................. 438

6.3.2 - Front panel LCD blank ............................................................................ 438
6.3.3 - Default analogue video input................................................................... 438
6.3.4 - Autotest problem ..................................................................................... 438
6.3.5 - Recommendations when using the MSU 4440 decoder ......................... 439
CHAPTER 7
CUSTOMER SERVICE
7.1 - EU Declaration of conformity ....................................................................... 443
7.2 - FCC Declaration of conformity..................................................................... 444
7.3 - Return your comments ................................................................................. 445
7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services................................................................... 446
CHAPTER 8
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACROYNMS
Abbreviations and acronyms .............................................................................. 451

xviii CONTENTS

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1
Chapter 1
Specifications
1.1 - Encoding system overview ................................................................... 3
1.2 - DBE 4110 overview ................................................................................ 4
1.3 - Sales references..................................................................................... 6
1.4 - Specifications ......................................................................................... 8

1.4.1 - Description of basic functions ........................................................... 8
1.4.1.1 - Video audio interface (SDI) .............................................................. 8
1.4.1.2 - De-embedded audio inputs .............................................................. 8
1.4.1.3 - Analogue audio inputs with 2 stereo audio ...................................... 9
1.4.1.4 - TS output ......................................................................................... 9
1.4.1.5 - Control and command interface ..................................................... 10
1.4.1.6 - MPEG-2 4:2:0MP@ML .................................................................. 12
1.4.1.7 - Audio encoder ................................................................................ 13
1.4.1.8 - SI/PSI management ....................................................................... 14
1.4.1.9 - Low delay mode ............................................................................. 14
1.4.1.10 - Private data .................................................................................. 15
1.4.1.11 - Stream Editing ............................................................................. 17
1.4.1.12 - VBI processing ............................................................................. 18
1.4.1.13 - COMPIN board ............................................................................ 23
1.4.2 - Description of optional functions..................................................... 25
1.4.2.1 - ASI TS input (option)...................................................................... 25
1.4.2.2 - DVB Common Scr. (option) ........................................................... 27
1.4.2.3 - MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML (option) ........................................................ 28
1.4.2.4 - RS232 (option) ............................................................................... 29
1.4.2.5 - Ext. Modulator C&C (option) .......................................................... 30
1.4.2.6 - DPSN board (option)...................................................................... 31
1.4.2.7 - 4 stereo audios (option) ................................................................. 32
1.4.2.8 - 2 AES/EBU interfaces (option)....................................................... 34
1.4.2.9 - Int. modulator (option) .................................................................... 35
1.4.2.10 - Alarm Relay Closure (option) ....................................................... 36
1.4.2.11 - XLR adapter cord (option)............................................................ 37
1.4.2.12 - Source switching tolerance .......................................................... 37
1.4.3 - AC power supply............................................................................. 38

2 Chapter 1 - Specifications
1.4.4 - Mechanical characteristics ............................................................. 39

1.4.5 - Environmental specifications .......................................................... 42
1.4.6 - Equipment view .............................................................................. 45

Chapter 1 3
1.1 - Encoding system overview
1.1 - ENCODING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The DBE 4110 DSNG encoder has been designed to meet the main operational
Digital SNG requirements: robustness, reduced size (2RU) and weight, easy to use
and to set up, high quality video and audio, low delay and ultra low delay modes for
live interviews.
video, TS
audio, Encoder
data DBE 4110 C&C Modulator
Figure 1.1: DBE 4110 system overview

4 Chapter 1
1.2 - DBE 4110 overview
1.2 - DBE 4110 OVERVIEW
The DBE 4110 is a compact MPEG-2-standard encoding (or compression) device

offering both MP@ML and 4:2:2P@ML standard. The use of the 4:2:2 Profile
allows compression rates of up to 50Mbit/s without prior sub-sampling and ensures
a high quality compression. Performance and cost-effectiveness are achieved
through the THOMSON second generation chipset which offers five-level
hierarchical motion estimation, far-ranging motion vector calculations and two-pass
rate control for improved bit-rate allocation.
The DBE 4110 single-service encoder performs encoding from a composite source
or SDI with or without embedded audio. A maximum of 6 separate audio inputs are
available.
The DBE 4110 ensures interoperability with DVB-standard equipment. A fully
DVB-compliant transport stream composed of video, audios, data as well as SI/PSI
information is delivered directly in DVB-ASI format.
Furthermore the DBE 4110 is fully compliant with the scrambling features defined
by EBU (namely mode 1), for exchanging scrambled MPEG-2 streams.
The DBE 4110 can be controlled through its front panel to facilitate basic operation.
The DBE 4110 is provided with two Control&Command software programs,
running on Windows NTTM based PC station using an Ethernet 10 baseT interface:
• Fast_DSNG software for easy and intuitive operation, specially designed for
DSNG operators,
• Stand-Alone Control&Command software for advanced operation.
This document refers to release 7.0 of the DBE 4110.
Figure 1.2 gives an overview of the DBE 4110.

Chapter 1 5
1.2 - DBE 4110 overview
Alarms
PAL/
SECAM/ Composite 4:2:2 //
NTSC Video Interface TS MSDL Alarm
DPSN board MPEG-2 board relay
PAL/ 4:2:2 // Video
COMPIN board Encoder
NTSC
Modulated
SDI output
SDI IN Video ISMB board
Audio VBI
Interface Processor MUX
ASI
2 AES/EBU
ATADI Interface
board 2 x MPEG-1
2 stereo Audio
anal. audios ADC Encoders
SDI and AES/EBU 4 x MPEG-1

Audio
TS IN ASI Encoders Basic
ASI AMuSE board
Interface
RS 232
Data Hardware
Interface or Software
Scrambler option
Control/Command
LCD Alarms
Figure 1.2: DBE 4110 overall block diagram

6 Chapter 1
1.3 - Sales references
1.3 - SALES REFERENCES
DBE 4110 DSNG encoder (with deactivated DVB-CS scrambler: N4110220AK,

or without scrambling capability: N4110220BK), including:
• Basic audio/video encoder,
• COMPIN board,
• Low Delay Mode,
• VBI Processing,
• 100 to 230 VAC power supply,
∗ Software options:
• ASI TS input (N41STS1NAK),
• DVB Common Scr. (N41SDVCFAK),
• MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML (N41S422PAK),
• RS 232 (N41SD56KAK),
• Ext. Modulator C&C (N41SM0DCAK).
Important: All software options are purchased for, and attributed to, a given DBE 4110
unit and may not apply to several units. Each software option is attributed a licence
number which is requested prior to use.
∗ Hardware options:
• 4 stereo audios (N41HAMUBAK): AMuSE board,
• 2 AES/EBU interfaces (N41HATADAK): ATADI board,
• Alarm Relay Closure (N41HMSDLAK): RSMAINT and MSDL boards,
• DPSN board (N41HDPSNAK),
• Int. Modulator (N41HM0DUAK): ISMB board,
• XLR adapter cord (N41HAXLRAK).

Chapter 1 7
1.3 - Sales references
Board connections
SSEB (basic)
ATADI (option) COMPIN (basic) or DPSN (option)
MSDL (option) AMuSE (option) or ISMB (option)
Figure 1.3: DBE 4110 rear panel

8 Chapter 1
1.4 - Specifications
1.4 - SPECIFICATIONS
1.4.1 - Description of basic functions
1.4.1.1 - Video audio interface (SDI)

The SMPTE 259M standard SDI input uses a female 75Ω BNC connector. It
accepts a 270Mbit/s “component” 625 or 525 line serial stream. It operates with a 0-
200m length cable (type RG11A/V Filotex or 8281 Belden).
1.4.1.2 - De-embedded audio inputs

Audio de-embedding is SMPTE 272MA-compliant.
Audio de-embedding is possible when:
• the video encoder uses the SDI input,
• the video encoder is not used and there is a signal at the SDI input,
and is not possible when the video encoder uses the composite video input.
The 270Mbit/s signal can contain up to 8 stereo audios. The DBE 4110 can de-
embed 2 stereo audios which are either:
• stereos 1 and 2 (DID = 2FF), or
• stereos 3 and 4 (DID = 1FD), or
• stereos 5 and 6 (DID = 1FB), or
• stereos 7 and 8 (DID = 2F9).
Characteristics:
• synchronous 48kHz 20 bits audio,
• de-embedding of 2 stereo audio channels,
• C, U and V bits are ignored,
• no pre-emphasis or de-emphasis.

Chapter 1 9
1.4.1.3 - Analogue audio inputs with 2 stereo audio
CHARACTERISTICS
• Input impedance set to 600Ω for all measurements.
• Input level adjustment set to 24dBu for all measurements.
• All measurements are performed with MPEG-1 compression, layer 2, 256kbit/s stereo
bitrate.
Input type Balanced

Input impedance 600Ω +/− 5% or high impedance (typ.
18kΩ)
Input level adjustment 0dBFS = +8 to +24dBu (in steps of 1dB)
Common mode rejection ratio > 60dB from 20Hz to 20kHz
Bandwidth 20Hz to 20kHz, (+/- 0.3dB)
(measured with a sinus sweep) Vin = 23.5dBu
Insertion gain +/- 0.3dB
Vin = 23.5dBu, 1kHz
Total harmonic distortion + noise <0.01% (ADC only) at 1kHz
<0.1% (ADC + MPEG-1 compression)
RMS measurement, from 20Hz to 20kHz
Vin = 23.5dBu
Signal to noise ratio ≥ 85dB
Vin = 23.5dBu at 1kHz
RMS measurement, from 20Hz to 20kHz,
unweighted
Crosstalk between any two mono chan- ≥ 80dB
nels V(in) = 23.5dBu, 1kHz
ADC resolution / sampling frequency 18 bits / 48kHz
Emphasis no pre-emphasis or de-emphasis
1.4.1.4 - TS output
The SSEB board delivers three identical ASI standard TS outputs on a female 75Ω
BNC connector. The ASI output runs at a constant 270Mbit/s. The TS data rate is

10 Chapter 1
supplemented with stuffing bytes to reach 270Mbit/s. “Data burst” mode is

implemented (individual bytes spread out in time).
The minimum TS data rate is 1Mbit/s and the maximum TS data rate is 54Mbit/s.
TS packet length is 188 or 204 bytes. In 204-byte mode, the last 16 bytes are set to
the value zero and are meant to be replaced by an error correction code (Reed
Solomon) in a downstream modulator.
CHARACTERISTICS
Standard CENELEC: EN50083-9

Mode Data burst
Signal amplitude 800mV ± 10%
Rise / fall time ≤ 1.2ns
Random jitter (using D21.5 signal) ≤ ± 4%
1.4.1.5 - Control and command interface

The DBE 4110 encoder can be operated either locally (front panel control) or by
remote control (using Control&Command software running on Windows NT based
PC station) using an Ethernet 10 baseT interface.
CHARACTERISTICS
Standard IEEE 802.3 - 10 Base T

Connector type RJ45 connector
Protocol TCP - IP based protocol
Two Control&Command software programs are provided:

• Fast_DSNG software for easy and intuitive operation, specially designed for
DSNG operators. Its main window is shown in the figure below,
• Stand-Alone Control&Command software for advanced operation.
Attention : Some functions are not controlled by all the interfaces.

Chapter 1 11
The recommended configuration of the PC supporting the stand-alone software is as

follows:
• 300 MHz Pentium II microprocessor, 64Mb RAM,
• 1.2Gb Hard drive,
• WINDOWS NT version 4 or WINDOWS 2000 software,
• ETHERNET board (e.g. Compaq Integrated Netelligent 10/100 TX PQ
Network Adapter),
• TCP/IP command interface (Microsoft TCP/IP-32),
• Screen 17 ", resolution SVGA (800x600), colour,
• Mouse.
The DBS 2930 Stand-Alone software provided can only control one encoder. To
control a complete broadcast system, please refer to the DBS 2930 datasheet for
details.

12 Chapter 1
1.4.1.6 - MPEG-2 4:2:0MP@ML

Video encoding complies with MPEG-2 standard ISO/IEC 13818-2.
CHARACTERISTICS
Video source • 50/60Hz frequencya
• Interlaced /progressive 4:2:2 video
• 10 bits
Encoding format • 2:1 vertical filtering (chrominance)
• 720, 704, 544, 480, 352 pixels
• 576 lines (50Hz) or 480 lines (60Hz)
• SIF mode (352 pixels, 288 lines (50 Hz) or
240 lines (60Hz))
GOP parameters •1≤M≤3
• M ≤ N ≤ 24
• Possibility of closed GOP
• Frame picture with adaptive field/frame
encoding modes (motion estimation and DCT)
• Seamless M and N parameter changing
Aspect ratio • Manual 4/3, 16/9,
• Automatic from WSS information or AFD
information.
Motion estimation vector range +126/-126 Vertical
(frame based) +254.5/-255 Horizontal
Bit rate • VBV model implementation
• Bit rate type: CBR
• Bit rate parameters:
100kbit/s steps
0.5Mbit/s ≤ bit rate ≤ 15Mbit/s
• SIF at 500kbit/s
(bitrates between 500Kbit/s and 2Mbit/s are
reserved for almost still pictures, depending
on encoding resolution and picture
complexity)
• Seamless bit rate change
Video buffer management Leak mode
Miscellaneous functions • Detection of scene cuts, 3/2 pull down, bad
edit
• Capture and transmission of Digital Vertical
Time Code (into GOP header).
• 75% bar pattern insertion

Chapter 1 13
CHARACTERISTICS
Normal delay • Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value
(+/- 5ms): 740ms (50Hz), 617ms (60Hz),
guaranteed delay from 1.5 to 15Mbit/s.
a.Throughout the document, the value 60Hz in relation to video signal implies a real value of
59.94Hz
1.4.1.7 - Audio encoder

The SSEB board features 2 MPEG-1 audio encoders in accordance with ISO/IEC
11172-3, layer 2, 48kHz standard.
For each audio encoder, possible rate / mode combinations are listed in the table
below:
Rate (kbit/s) 64 96 128 192 256 384

Mode
Single Channel (Mono) X X X X
Dual Channel X X X X
Stereo X X X X
Joint Stereo X X X X
The audio encoding module performs automatic audio/video compensation delay.

The audio encoding module has audio pattern generation capability (2.1kHz 0dBFS
signal).
Input selection between analogue audio, de-embedded audio and AES/EBU audio
(N41HATADAK option) is separate for the 2 MPEG-1 audio encoders. Selection is
supervision-controlled.
Mono, stereo or dual-channel can be selected either manually, or automatically
from VPS information when present in the video source.
All command running is seamless apart from audio/video compensation delay
modification, analogue input level adjustment and changing between one and two
PIDs.
Each MPEG-1 dual channel encoder can be configured in such a way that it is
conveyed as a single PID or as two distinct PIDs. In this case the audio encoder
generates two single channel elementary streams, both having the same

14 Chapter 1
configuration except for the PID and the language code (both components will have
the same bitrate, etc.).
When there is no video component, the MPEG-1 encoder is in “radio mode” and the
delay (from SDI encoder input to PTS value, +/- 5ms) becomes equal to 150ms
(50Hz and 60Hz).
1.4.1.8 - SI/PSI management

The DBE 4110 has three operating modes for signalling generation:
• no signalling generated,
• generation of ISO tables (PAT, CAT, PMT, TSDT),
• generation of DVB tables (ISO tables + SDT, TDT, TOT, BAT, NIT).
The operating mode is selected by the operator.
The DBE 4110 regularly broadcasts signalling information according to repetition
rates that can be set up from the Control & Command station (remote control).
Tables required for DVB DSNG operation are automatically generated according to
transmitted signal configuration.
1.4.1.9 - Low delay mode

Two trade offs between delay and video compression quality are now available:
“Low delay” mode

4:2:0MP@ML MPEG-2 video • Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS
value (+/- 5ms): 320ms (50Hz), 267ms
(60Hz),
guaranteed delay from 4 to 15Mbit/s.
• I and P pictures, no B picture.
4:2:2P@ML MPEG-2 video • Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS
value (+/- 5ms): 280ms (50Hz), 233ms
(60Hz),
• I and P pictures, no B picture.

Chapter 1 15
“Ultra low delay” mode

4:2:0MP@ML MPEG-2 video • Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS
value (+/- 5ms): 140ms (50Hz), 134ms
(60Hz), guaranteed delay from 6 to
15Mbit/s.
• I pictures, no P and B pictures.
4:2:2P@ML MPEG-2 video • Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS
value (+/- 5ms): 100ms (50Hz), 100ms
(60Hz), guaranteed delay from 6 to
50Mbit/s.
• I pictures, no P and B pictures.
SIF mode is not available in ultra low delay mode.

Use of MSU 4422 decoder adds approximately 70 ms to each delay.
Switching between normal and low delay or ultra low delay is not seamless (picture
is disturbed for 2 or 3 seconds).
Bitrates below 4Mbit/s in low delay / 4:2:0 mode, and bitrates below 6Mbit/s in low
delay / 4:2:2 mode and ultra low delay mode are reserved for almost still pictures,
depending on encoding resolution and picture complexity.
1.4.1.10 - Private data

The possibility of entering private data via Ethernet, as TS packets or sections, is
included in the basic version of the DBE 4110 (List of supported protocols in the
second table below).
CHARACTERISTICS
Standard IEEE 802.3 - 10 Base T

Connector type RJ45 connector
Protocol TCP - IP based protocol
When data is injected as MPEG-2 TS packets, the DBE 4110 may perform PID
remapping. The TS packets received are not supposed to contain a PCR or a PTS.
When data is injected as DVB sections, the DBE 4110 performs packetisation.

16 Chapter 1
Maximum data rate depends on Ethernet network traffic. When the Ethernet
network is not a limiting factor, the guaranteed maximum data rate depends on
internal conditions; it is never under 64kbit/s and can go up to 750kbit/s when the
following conditions are met:
• TS input unused,
• 1 service composed of:
- 0 or 1 video component,
- and 0 or 1 audio component,
- and 0 to 4 ECM components.
• The maximum permitted data rate parameter is set at 1 Mbit/s.

Chapter 1 17
7.0 release protocols Title

THOMSON MPEG1 1G/2G Control/Command protocol
proprietary protocol Messages description
VIACCESS Dossier de spécifications fonctionnelles détaillées
proprietary protocol V1.0 Diffuseur de Messagerie
réf. R/PACMAN/DM/SPE01
TCP DVB simulcrypt ETSI TS 103 197
Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)
Head-End Implementation of DVB simulcrypt
ETSI TS 101 197-1

Technical specification of Simulcrypt in DVB sys-
tems (06/97)
UDP DVB simulcrypt ETSI TS 103 197
with TCP control layer Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)
UDP DVB simulcrypt ETSI TS 103 197
without TCP control layer Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)
1.4.1.11 - Stream Editing

In order to obtain an editable MPEG stream between two time code values, the
DBE 4110 encoder can insert an I picture and create a closed GOP when the
incoming DVITC reaches a predefined value. The DBE 4110 automatically chooses
the DVITC if it is on lines 19 and 332 (50Hz) or lines 11 and 274 (60Hz). If the
DVITC is on other lines, the user must specify the lines using the DBS 2930
Control&Command software.
The predefined value is sent to the DBE 4110 via MTEP / TCP/IP protocol
(available on request). This value must be sent in advance with reference to the
current time code value. The DBE 4110 can store up to 32 preset values. About this
limit the new values are ignored.
Notes:
- Stream Editing does not operate with the VITC.
- Stream Editing does not operate in 60Hz drop frame mode.

18 Chapter 1
- Stream Editing does not operate with the video in 4:2:2:P.

- Stream Editing does not operate in low or ultra low delay mode.
The video buffer level is controlled so as to be more constant at each edit point
(close to the maximum level).
Please contact NEXTREAM for additional information if you are interested in this
function.
1.4.1.12 - VBI processing

This module is capable of processing ancillary data from either the SDI or the PAL
input.
The following diagrams describe the different ways ancillary data can or cannot be
processed:

Chapter 1 19
Diagram 1 VBI
PAL
video
SDI
video + VBI
Diagram 2 PAL
SDI
Diagram 3 PAL
video + VBI
SDI
Diagram 4 video
PAL
VBI SDI
Diagram 5 VBI
PAL
video + VBI SDI
Figure 1.4: Ancillary data processing

20 Chapter 1
• Diagram 1 shows a VBI inserter function. VBI information from the

composite video signal is conveyed in the TS bitstream as described in DVB
standard. The composite video signal must be externally synchronised with the
SDI video source.
• Diagrams 2 and 3 illustrate a common setup.
• Diagram 4 shows a configuration similar to diagram 1 but which is not
supported.
• Diagram 5 illustrates the fact that the DBE 4110 cannot simultaneously
process VBI information coming from both video inputs.
The VBI processor capabilities are described in the following table.

Chapter 1 21
Possible
lines
Data Frequency Data standards Input Signal
(starting
from 1)
Ceefax B 50Hz ITU-R.BT653 SDI waveform 6 to 22
magazine ETS 300 706 or 320 to 335
and/or subtitles Composite
Transparent 50Hz SDI 6 to 22
lines or 318 to 335
Composite
VITC 50Hz IEC 60461 SDI waveform 6 to 22
SMPTE 12M or
Composite
DVITC 50Hz SMPTE 266M SDI waveform 6 to 22
WSS 50Hz ETS300 294 SDI waveform 23
or
Composite
WSS 50Hz Proprietary based SDI binary 23
on SMPTE 291M
VPS 50Hz ETS 300 231 SDI waveform 16
or
Composite
AFD 50Hz First part of SDI 11 and 324
viideo index
SMPTE RP186
Transparent 60Hz SDI or 10 to 21

lines Composite 273 to 284
VITC 60Hz IEC 60461 SDI waveform 10 to 21
SMPTE 12M or
Composite
DVITC 60Hz SMPTE 266M SDI waveform 10 to 21
Closed caption 60Hz EIA-608 SDI waveform 21
or
Composite

22 Chapter 1
Max
MPEG
Data treated Treatment Notes
standards
lines
Ceefax B 16 per demodulated then mapped into TS ETSI EN 300 472 a
magazine field packets DVB A056
and/or subtitles ETSI EN 301 775
Transparent 8 per luminance samples, 8 bits, DVB A056 b
lines frame 720 samples/line, mapped into TS ETSI EN 301 775
packets
VITC 1 demodulated then mapped into ISO/IEC 13818-2
GOP header
DVITC 1 demodulated then mapped into ISO/IEC 13818-2
GOP header
WSS 1 demodulated then mapped into TS DVB A056
packets and/or used to inform the ETSI EN 301 775
video encoder
WSS 1 binary WSS from DBI 2000 DVB A056 c
(AVA) is mapped into TS packets ETSI EN 301 775
and/or used to inform the video
encoders
VPS 1 demodulated, then mapped into DVB A056
TS packets and/or used to control ETSI EN 301 775
the audio encoders
AFD 2 inserted into video stream ARDSPE1
24 april 1998
Transparent 8 per luminance samples, 8 bits, DVB A056

lines frame 720 samples/line, mapped into TS ETSI EN 301 775 b
packets
VITC 1 demodulated then mapped into ISO/IEC 13818-2
GOP header
DVITC 1 demodulated then mapped into ISO/IEC 13818-2
GOP header
Closed caption 1 demodulated then mapped into ATSC A/53
video user data

Chapter 1 23
a.Since 6.5 release, CEEFAX extraction from the incoming video signal has been improved. The data
positionning window has been widened to +/-1µs. Demodulation process benefits from an automatic
threshold level adjustment.
b.Restrictions of DVB A056 concerning the MSU 4422 decoder.
c.Not recommended for new systems.
Notes
1. Data cannot be encoded simultaneously according to 50Hz and 60Hz MPEG-2
standard.
2. Each CEEFAX B, VPS, WSS can be mapped into its individual PID (max. 4 PID) or all
the previous can be mapped together into the same PID.
3. The same VBI line cannot be associated with different PIDs.
1.4.1.13 - COMPIN board

The COMPIN board provides composite video input for the DBE 41xx encoders.
The COMPIN board fits in the upper 6U slot.
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Standard PAL BDGHI / NTSC M

(ITU-R Rec. 624)
Input impedance BNC / 75Ω
Input level (100% white bar) 1 volt peak-to-peak, nominal,
with sync signal
Note: the COMPIN board does not handle SECAM standard.
ENCODER + DECODER
CHARACTERISTICS WITH MSU 4422 DECODER
PAL STANDARD
(excluding VTR and synchronised modes)
Measurement conditions set A 4:2:2P, GOP 1/1, 50Mbit/s, 720 pixels

(video encoding)
Measurement conditions set B 4:2:0MP@ML, GOP 12/3, 14Mbit/s,
(video encoding) 720 pixels

24 Chapter 1
ENCODER + DECODER
PAL STANDARD
Luminance bandwidth 0.15 to 5.5MHz ± 0.5dB

(-3dB at 5.7MHz)
Luminance signal to noise ratio
(ramp pattern, filtered and weighted) set A ≥ 61dB
set B ≥ 60dB
Differential gain ≤ 1.5%

Differential phase ≤ 2°
Luminance amplitude linearity 700mV ± 14mV
ENCODER + DECODER
NTSC STANDARD
Measurement conditions set A 4:2:2P, GOP 1/1, 50Mbit/s, 720 pixels

(video encoding)
Measurement conditions set B 4:2:0MP@ML, GOP 12/3, 14Mbit/s,
(video encoding) 720 pixels
Luminance bandwidth (set B) 0.15 to 3.8MHz ± 0.5dB
(-3dB at 4.1MHz)
Luminance signal to noise ratio
(ramp pattern, filtered and weighted) set A ≥ 61dB
set B ≥ 60dB
Differential gain ≤ 2%
Luminance amplitude linearity 700mV ± 14mV
Note:
COMPIN signal to noise ratio is measured in a different way in comparison with the DPSN
board. In the same conditions, the value for the COMPIN board would be approximatively
3dB higher.

Chapter 1 25
The COMPIN board features a VTR mode which is recommended for using bad
quality, jittered signals. In VTR mode, the sampling is made on 8 bits instead of 10
and the bandwidth is around 3MHz.
The COMPIN board features a built-in synchroniser. This synchroniser can be used
in order to synchronise video input to an external composite video reference. This
synchroniser can also be used with or without an external reference in order to help
the encoder to deal with bad quality signals.
The COMPIN board does not add any delay, except when the built-in synchroniser
is activated and in that case it adds approximatively 30ms in 50Hz and 25ms in
60Hz. The synchroniser drops or repeats a frame when the accumulative delay
between the input and the reference is excessive. Hence the lipsync evolves like a
sawtooth between - 10ms and + 30ms (in 50Hz, without reference signal).
In normal mode and in NTSC standard, the COMPIN board can be programmed to
take into account or not a 7.5 IRE setup.
1.4.2 - Description of optional functions
1.4.2.1 - ASI TS input (option)

Sales reference: N41STS1NAK
ASI standard TS input on a female 75Ω BNC connector.
The 270Mbit/s signal can carry 188/204 length TS packets. The max. TS data rate is
54Mbit/s. The TS Input interface accepts both “data burst” and “data packet”
modes. Incoming data must be spread over time, so that no more than one TS packet
is received over a period of 26µs.
The external TS ASI input can be used for encoder cascading: up to three encoders
can be cascaded by connecting the ASI output of one encoder to the ASI input of
another one. This results in an MPTS with consistent PSI/SI tables, each video
source having its own PCR unless the locking on incoming PCR is used (see the
section below).
To perform encoder cascading from the front panel, only one parameter must be set.
When encoders are cascaded, incoming PID/service-id can be remapped to avoid
conflicts.

26 Chapter 1
Notes:
- DBE 4110 TS OUT connected to DBE 4110 TS IN operates with a cable up to 200m in
length, BELDEN 8281 type.
- A programme going from ASI IN to ASI OUT will undergo a PCR jitter increase of +/-
75ns max. The maximum PCR jitter allowed by DVB standard is +/- 500ns. A programme
encoded by a DBE 41XX will present an original PCR jitter of +/- 37.5 ns max.
∗ Locking on incoming PCR

This function requires the ASI TS input option.
It is possible to create a single programme with components generated by more than
one encoder. The principal application is the generation of a programme containing
one video component and many audio components, like a "mosaic" programme or a
mutilingual programme.
All encoders must receive the same video source (even an encoder which is used
only for audio encoding), and all encoders must use the same PCR. All encoders
must be set to provide the same end to end delay.
The use of the same PCR by all encoders is made possible by the new ability of the
encoder to lock its internal PCR generator on the PCR coming from a component
present in the ASI TS input stream.
We recommend that you limit the cascade to three or less devices.
TS IN TS OUT TS IN TS OUT TS IN TS OUT
DBE 41xx DBE 41xx DBE 41xx

VIDEO IN VIDEO IN VIDEO IN
If a progam requires more than three encoders, it is better to install them in parallel
and use a multiplexer to gather the components.

Chapter 1 27
TS IN TS OUT TS IN
DBE 41xx
VIDEO IN
DBX 4300
TS IN TS OUT TS IN
DBE 41xx TS OUT
VIDEO IN
TS IN TS OUT TS IN
DBE 41xx
VIDEO IN
1.4.2.2 - DVB Common Scr. (option)

Sales reference: N41SDVCFAK
This option includes the capability to scramble the outgoing transport stream
according to the DVB common scrambling standard. The DBE 4110 is fully
compliant with the scrambling features defined by EBU (BISS modes 1 and E), for
exchanging scrambled MPEG-2 streams. The control word is fixed.
The fixed control word can be set using the front panel. No ECMs are broadcast in
this case, and there is no need for EMM generation. The control word must be
entered in the decoder to enable descrambling.
Attention :
1. The incoming stream from the ASI input cannot be scrambled from the front panel and
the Fast_DSNG software. To scramble the incoming stream, the encoder must be
controlled by the DBS 2930 software with the N2930140 option (fixed control word) and
the DBS 2908/11/12 MPEG Channel Controller.
2. The BISS mode E is only controlled by the front panel.

28 Chapter 1
1.4.2.3 - MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML (option)

Sales reference: N41S422PAK
CHARACTERISTICS
Video source • 50/60Hz frequency

• Interlaced /progressive 4:2:2 video
• 10 bits
Encoding format • 720 pixels
• 576 lines (50Hz) or 480 lines (60Hz)
GOP parameters •1≤M≤3
• M ≤ N ≤ 24
• Possibility of closed GOP
• Frame picture with adaptive field/frame
encoding modes (motion estimation and
DCT)
• Seamless M and N parameter changing
Bit rate • VBV model implementation
• Bit rate type: CBR
• Bit rate parameters:
100kbit/s steps
0.5Mbit/s ≤ bit rate ≤ 50Mbit/s
(bitrates below 4Mbit/s are reserved for
almost still pictures, depending on
encoding resolution and picture
complexity)
• Seamless bit rate change
Miscellaneous functions • Capture and transmission of Digital
Vertical Time Code.
• 75% bar pattern insertion
Video buffer management • Leak mode
Delay • Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS
value (+/- 5ms): 740ms (50Hz), 617ms
(60Hz),
Switching between 4:2:0MP@ML and 4:2:2P@ML is not seamless.

Chapter 1 29
1.4.2.4 - RS232 (option)

Sales reference: N41SD56KAK
Description:
- 1200 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 baud,
- 1 start bit,
- 1 stop bit,
- 8 data bits,
- no parity,
- protocol: raw data is directly used to supply the TS packet payload. The
DBE 4110 adjusts the adaptation field of each packet according to the
number of bytes received from the data injection through RS232,
- SubD9 SERIAL 1 RS232 connector.

30 Chapter 1
1.4.2.5 - Ext. Modulator C&C (option)

Sales reference: N41SM0DCAK
The following modulators are operated from the DBE 4110 front panel and/or from
the Stand-Alone Control & Command software and/or the Fast_DSNG software:
ASI input
Modulator models up-converters
interface
NTC2062
"2062ZP", "2062ZR", "2062ZQ", NTC3631xZ
"2062ZK", "2062ZM", "2062ZL". "3631BZ", "3631DZ", "3631EZ",
"3631FZ", "3631GZ", "3631HZ",
NTC2080 "3631IZ", "3631KZ", "3631LZ",
"2080ZP", "2080ZR", "2080ZT", "3631GE", "3631AZ", "3631TB".
"2080ZQ", "2080ZK", "2080ZM",
"2080ZO", "2080ZL".
NTC2077Sx
"2077SP", "2077SR", "2077ST", without NTC3359AE
"2077SK", "2077SM", "2077SO".
NTC2077Hx
"2077HP", "2077HR", "2077HT", without
"2077HQ", "2077HK", "2077HM",
"2077HO", "2077HL".
NTC2077Fx
"2077FM", "2077FT", "2077FO", without
"2077FQ", "2077FL", "2077FR".
Newtec modulator parameters are included in the prestored configurations in the

DBE 4110 that can be recalled at a key stroke.
Notes:
1. The L band output of the modulator (IFL) is for monitoring purposes only and cannot be
switched off.
2. An RS485 cord is provided with the option for Control & Command between the
encoder and the modulator.

Chapter 1 31
1.4.2.6 - DPSN board (option)

Sales reference: N41HDPSNAK
This board offers the composite video input.
The DPSN board fits in the upper 6U slot, instead of the COMPIN board..
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Standard PAL BDGHI / NTSC M / SECAM

(ITU-R Rec. 624)
Correction / input impedance BNC / 75Ω
Input level (100% white bar) 1 volt peak-to-peak, nominal,
with sync signal
ENCODER + DECODER
WITH MSU 4422 DECODER
CHARACTERISTICS
PAL STANDARD
Measurement conditions/video 4:2:0 MP@ML, 14Mbit/s,

encoding 720 pixels/line, 12/3 GOP
Luminance bandwidth 0.15 to 5.5MHz ± 0.5dB
(-3dB at 5.7MHz)
Luminance signal to noise ratio ≥ 58dB
(grey level)
Differential gain ≤ 2%
Luminance amplitude linearity ≤ 700 mV ±14 mV
Use of DPSN board adds approximately 20ms in 50Hz and 17ms in 60Hz.
Caution: The COMPIN board is recommended for customers having PAL and NTSC
signals.

32 Chapter 1
1.4.2.7 - 4 stereo audios (option)

Sales reference: N41HAMUBAK
TS Out
ATADI board
AMuSE SSEB
Pre-multiplexer Multiplexer
Encoder Encoder Encoder Encoder Encoder Encoder
SFC SFC SFC SFC
One One
DAC One group DAC
group group
AES/ AES/ AES/ AES/
Analogue stereo Analogue stereo
De-embedder EBU EBU EBU EBU De-embedder
SDI SDI 1&2&3&4 1 2 3 4 SDI

2 Analogue stereo
IN OUT balanced unbalanced IN
SDI DIGITAL AUDIO ANALOGUE AUDIO SDI

SFC: Sampling Frequency Converter
Figure 1.5: Audio block diagram with AMuSE and SSEB
The AMuSE board features either 4 MPEG-1 audio encoders in accordance with
ISO/IEC 11172-3, layer 2, 48 kHz standard or 4 AC3 packetisers.
• Common features:
- the AMuSE board fits in the lower 6U slot,
- the DBE 4110 accepts one AMuSE board,
- it is not possible to set up an AMuSE board partly in MPEG-1 encoder and
partly in AC3 packetiser,
- when the SDI is selected, the same group number from the four possible
groups must be supplied for encoders 1 and 2. The same rule applies for
encoders 3 and 4.
• MPEG-1 audio encoding features:
- each of the four encoders can independently receive its input from the SDI
or AES/EBU.
The AES/EBU input is either balanced on SubD15 (AES 3/1992, 110Ω
input impedance) or unbalanced on BNC (SMPTE 276M, 75Ω input

Chapter 1 33
impedance). The selection is made by the Control & Command station; all
AES/EBU inputs are either balanced or unbalanced.
- audio de-embedding is always possible and is not dependent on the video
encoder input. Audio de-embedding complies with SMPTE 272M.
- it supports input PCM samples at 32, 44.1 or 48kHz (SDI allows only
48kHz).
- before encoding, the audio stream goes through a sample rate converter.
Thus, the audio stream is resampled at 48kHz and synchronised with the
programme clock reference.
- for each audio encoder, possible rate / mode combinations are listed in the
table below:
Rate (kbit/s) 64 96 128 192 256 384

Mode
Single Channel (Mono) X X X X
Dual Channel X X X X
Stereo X X X X
Joint Stereo X X X X
- all command running is seamless apart from audio/video compensation

delay modification.
- each of the four audio encoders has audio pattern generation capability
(1kHz, -6dBFS signal).
- when there is no video component, the MPEG-1 encoder is in “radio mode”
and the delay (from SDI encoder input to PTS value, +/- 5ms) becomes
equal to 150ms (50Hz and 60Hz).
• AC3 packetiser features:
- the AMuSE board accepts up to 4 externally encoded Dolby AC3 streams
and performs PES and TS packetisation on these streams.
- accepted external Dolby AC3 encoders: DP567 (AC3 stereo), DP569 (AC3
stereo and surround) - 32, 40 and 48kbit/s rates are not supported.
- input data packing: professional mode 32 bit (ch1, and ch2).
- external Dolby AC3 encoder sampling frequency must be set to 48kHz.
- external Dolby AC3 encoder delay must be set to 179ms.
- any AMuSE input can be used. If SDI input is used, the SDI input of
AMuSE must be synchronous with the SDI input of SSEB. If the AES/EBU
input (either balanced or unbalanced) is used, the external Dolby encoder

34 Chapter 1
must be genlocked by the sync output of AMuSE.

- AMuSE AC3 packetiser is not possible together with a video component in
low or ultra low delay mode.
- when there is no video component, the AC3 encoder is in “radio mode” and
the delay (from external AC3 encoder to PTS value, +/- 5ms) becomes
equal to 349ms (50Hz and 60Hz).
- when an AC3 component is generated, a descriptor is automatically added
to the PMT (descriptor private id 106).
1.4.2.8 - 2 AES/EBU interfaces (option)

Sales reference: N41HATADAK
AMuSE board TS Out
SSEB ATADI
Multiplexer
Encoder Encoder
SFC SFC
DAC One group DAC

Analogue stereo De-embedder Analogue stereo AES/ AES/
EBU EBU
SDI 1&2 1 2
2 Analogue stereo balanced unbalanced
IN
ANALOGUE AUDIO SDI DIGITAL AUDIO

Figure 1.6: Audio block diagram with ATADI and SSEB
The ATADI board provides AES/EBU interfaces for the two audio MPEG-1
encoders located on the SSEB board of the encoder.
AES/EBU interfaces are either balanced on SubD15 (AES 3/1992,110Ω input
impedance) or unbalanced on BNC (SMPTE 276M, 75Ω input impedance). The
selection is made by the Control & Command station; all AES/EBU inputs are
either balanced or unbalanced.

Chapter 1 35
The ATADI board fits in the upper 3U slot.

It supports input PCM samples at 32, 44.1 or 48 kHz.
The ATADI board performs a sampling frequency conversion to 48KHz,
synchronised with the programme clock reference.
1.4.2.9 - Int. modulator (option)

Sales reference: N41HMODUAK
The ISMB board fits in the lower 6U slot.
The ISMB board is an internal modulator which takes the TS stream produced by
the encoder and transforms it into a modulated form. Three modulations are
available : QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM. Output is both IF and L-band.
When the ISMB is used, TS packets must be in (188+16) form.
The features of ISMB board are listed in the following table:
Standards EN 300421, EN 301210

Input Bit rate 1.5 to 28 Mbit/s
FEC Energy dispersal PRBS, 24 or 32 bits
Reed Solomon Encoder 188+16 format (synchro byte included)
correction capability
Interleaving I = 12
Convolution 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 8/9
Depth: K=7
Impulse response cos (linear phase)
Roll off 26% and 35%, or Automatic (depending
on modulation scheme)
IF output Modulation QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM

36 Chapter 1
Bit/Symbol ratio 2, 3 or 4
Symbol rate 0.9 to 16 MSymbol/s
Frequency (RF) variable 70/140MHz, selectable within
50 to 180MHz range, by 125KHz step
Stability +/- 15ppm
Level -20dBm to +5dBm, by 0.5dB steps
Amplitude accuracy +/- 0.2dB
Quadrature error +/- 2°
Eye closure 5% (full Nyquist filtering)
Return loss -23dB min.
Phase noise -96dBc at F=100kHz
Harmonics -45dB min.
Spurious performance -55dBc/4kHz at -10dBm
(modulated carrier) in 4KHz (ref. INTELSAT -IESS)
IF LO Local oscillator for 100MHz
block-converter synchronisation
L-Band O/P Frequency range 0.950 to 1.750GHz by 1kHz step
Stability +/- 50ppm
Level variable, -20dBm to +5dBm, by 0.5dB
step
An RS485 cord is provided with the ISMB board. This cord externally links the
ISMB board to the encoder and is used for the control&command. This cord is the
same as the one described in the section "External Modulator Control". "External
Modulator Control" option is not required to operate the ISMB board.
1.4.2.10 - Alarm Relay Closure (option)

Sales reference: N41HMSDLAK
This function consists of two boards: the RSMAINT board and the MSDL board.
In the event of a major alarm, an alarm loop (voltage free contact) is activated on
the MSDL board.

Chapter 1 37
It is possible to activate the alarm relay either on major alarms or on major and
minor alarms. The choice is made in the encoder advanced parameters in the
{Technical configuration} application.
∗ RSMAINT board
This board is connected to the front of the device, behind the front panel, in the
upper slot, and provides frontal access to the normal/fail switch associated with the
alarm relay (MSDL board).
The RSMAINT board also hosts a maintenance RS232 link (SubD9).
∗ MSDL board
This board hosts the alarm relay and the corresponding SubD9 connector giving
access to the two voltage free contacts.
The maximum DC voltage supported is 48V.
The MSDL board also hosts the Dynamux SubD9 connector.
The MSDL board fits in the lower 3U slot.
1.4.2.11 - XLR adapter cord (option)

Sales reference: N41HAXLRAK
This is an adapter cord with one end terminated by four XLR connectors and the
other end terminated by a SubD15 connector.
The cord is approximatively one metre long. It can be used with SSEB analogue
audio inputs, or ATADI digital audio inputs, or AMuSE digital audio inputs.
1.4.2.12 - Source switching tolerance

When the video input signal of the encoder is the result of a switch between two
signals, a transient perturbation can be observed, its importance and its duration
depend on the following factors:
• timing relationship between the two signals,
• instant of the switch (relative to beginning of a frame),
• encoder video input used (SDI, composite),
• encoder video processing involved.
When the video input signal is the result of a switch between two signals which are
synchronous (same 27MHz for both) and if the switching action is compliant with

38 Chapter 1
SMPTE RP168 (which mainly defines line number and part of line allowed for
swiching), the following table predicts the visible effect of the switch:
Time difference
Video input and processing between switched Effects on video
signalsa
SDI on SSEB/ SSEB 0 to +/- 1/2 line image perturbation during
one image
analogue on DPSN / SSEB 0 to +/- 1/2 line image perturbation during
several images
analogue on COMPIN / SSEB 0 to +/- 1/2 line image perturbation during
several images
analogue on COMPIN - (syn- any image perturbation during
chroniser mode) / SSEB several images
analogue on COMPIN - (VTR 0 to +/- 9µs image perturbation during
mode) / SSEB several images
analogue on COMPIN - (VTR 0 to +/- 1/2 line image perturbation during
and synchroniser modes) / several images
SSEB
a.Outside this range, there is a possibility of a black output after the switching during a few seconds.
1.4.3 - AC power supply
CHARACTERISTICS
Mains voltage 100V - 230V (one range with no switching)
Mains frequency 50Hz - 60Hz
Current rating 2A - 1A
Inrush current < 50A at 230V (cold start)
Network connection Type A device connected by a non-indus-
trial CEI 60320 compliant plug

Chapter 1 39
CHARACTERISTICS
Isolation class I
Installation category II
Earthing arrangement TN, TTa
Mains fuse T4A H250V, dimensions 5x20mm
a.For Norway and only for this country, the device can be connected to an earthing arrangement of IT
type for a voltage between phases of 230V.
Other features of the power supply unit

Power factor (cos Φ) 0.98
Performance factor 70% (typical on 230VAC)
Overheating protection yesa
Overload protection yes
Fuse integrated
a.After overheating protection has triggered, the DBE 4110 will only re-start after OFF/ON on the
power outlet switch.
1.4.4 - Mechanical characteristics
• Unit width: 19”,

• Unit mounting centre distance in cabinet: 467mm,
• Unit height: 2U (88mm),
• Unit depth (including connectors): 620mm

40 Chapter 1
448
620
Air Inlet
Air Outlet
MPEG-2
DBE 4110 ESC
DVB
88 SHIFT
ENT 6.35
467
483
Figure 1.7: Dimensions

Chapter 1 41
• Weight: 13.7kg in its basic version, 15.3kg in its heaviest version.

The exact weight depends on the presence of the optional modules; the following
tables give the exact weight of each module with the corresponding slot allocation
seen from the rear panel of the equipment.
slot 0
slot 4 slot 1
slot 3 slot 2
Slot allocation DBE 4110 chassis (without board) 10.60kg

0 SSEB board 1.87kg
1 DPSN board 0.88kg
or COMPIN board 0.90kg
2 AMuSE board + 2TE (see note 1) 1.03 + 0.18kg
ISMB board 1.15kg
or 6TE 6U cache (see note 2) 0.17kg
3 MSDL board 0.33kg
4 ATADI board 0.33kg
In the front panel RSMAINT board 0.06kg
Notes:
1. A 2TE cache is delivered with the 4TE AMuSE board to fill 6TE slot number 2.
2. If there is no board in a slot, a cache is set in the empty allocation.

42 Chapter 1
1.4.5 - Environmental specifications
∗ CE labelling
• In compliance with the 93/68/CEE (22/07/93) directive.
∗ Safety specifications
• Legislation
Complies with European Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC (73/02) amended by
93/68/EEC.
• Standards
EN 60950 recommendations, 3rd edition, 2000/06,
UL 60950 and CSA C22.2 N°950-095, certification file n° E226371.
∗ Electromagnetic specifications
• Legislation
Complies with Directive 89/336/EEC (73/02) amended by 93/68/EEC (93/07).
• Standards
EN 55022, edition 1999 for Emission, including EN 61000-3-2,
EN 55024, edition 1999 for Immunity,
FCC Part 15, Class A.
∗ Relative humidity: 90% max., non condensing at 40°C (in operation).
∗ Operating temperature range: 0°C to 45°C (80% R.H.max, non condensing).
∗ Storage temperature range: -10°C to 70°C.

Chapter 1 43
∗ Mechanical specifications:
• Shock, transport category, TQC-TCE FP-M 204e level 2,
• Vibrations: during operation:
- vertical amplitude:
- constant displacement 0.75mm peak to peak from 10 to 31Hz,
- constant acceleration 1.5G (peak) from 31 to 150 Hz.
- sweep rate: 1 octave per minute,
- duration of 1 sweep cycle: 7.8 mn,
- quantity of sweep cycles: 10,
- 3 axes.
∗ Ventilated air flow: 100m3/h (the DBE 41xx has fans for forced air cooling).
The output air is hotter than the input air, about 5°C.
∗ Pollution degree: 2
∗ Protection degree: IP 20

44 Chapter 1
∗ Reliability: table of MTBF at 30°
Item MTBF (h)

Power supply Alpha 400 (AC) 563 000
SSEB 190 000
Front panel LCD 1 940 000
Backplane 6 250 000
DPSN 631 000
COMPIN 812 000
AMuSE 399 000
ATADI 2 940 000
MSDL 9 630 000
RSMAINT > 20 000 000
ISMB 909 000
Basic encoder without hardware options: MTBF at 30°C is 108,000h.

Chapter 1 45
1.4.6 - Equipment view
19” (483) FRONT
448
20
Front Panel
maintenance
link
FAN
POWER SUPPLY normal/fail

switch
AIR BACKPLANE AIR

FLOW FLOW
600
420
BOARDS FANS
9U
MAINS
connectors BACK
Figure 1.8: DBE 4110 unit top view

46 Chapter 1
MPEG-2
DBE 4110
ESC
DVB
SHIFT
ENT
AUDIO IN SDI IN SERIAL 1 SSEB LAN SERIAL 2 PCR OUT TS ASI IN OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3
I
ANALOG RS 232/485 10BaseT RS 485
GAIN FREQ ON O
ATADI COMPOSiTE MONITOR
DPSN
VIDEO IN EQ
BALANCED UNBALANCED
ALARM N Ph
REMOTE IF LO IF OUT L BAND OUT
T
Figure 1.9: DBE 4110 rear and front panel

Chapter 2 - Installation 47
Chapter 2
Installation
2.1 - Encoder installation ............................................................................. 50

2.1.1 - Manual switch setting ..................................................................... 50
2.1.2 - Desktop installation......................................................................... 53
2.1.3 - Rack installation.............................................................................. 53
2.1.4 - Mains power supply and protective earth ....................................... 55
2.1.4.1 - Power supply ................................................................................. 55
2.1.4.2 - Connection to the techical earth .................................................... 56
2.1.4.3 - On/Off switch ................................................................................. 56
2.2 - Board connections............................................................................... 57

2.2.1 - SSEB board (slot 0) ........................................................................ 58
2.2.2 - DPSN board (slot 1)........................................................................ 65
2.2.3 - COMPIN board (slot 1) ................................................................... 66
2.2.4 - AMUSE board (slot 2)..................................................................... 68
2.2.5 - ISMB board (slot 2)......................................................................... 73
2.2.6 - ATADI board (slot 4) ....................................................................... 75
2.2.7 - Alarm Relay Closure....................................................................... 77
2.2.8 - Modulator Control&Command ........................................................ 79
2.3 - Switching on the device ...................................................................... 80
2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input ............................. 81

2.4.1 - DPSN board.................................................................................... 81
2.4.2 - COMPIN board ............................................................................... 82
2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software.......................................................... 84

2.5.1 - Scope.............................................................................................. 84
2.5.2 - Installation....................................................................................... 84
2.5.2.1 - Environment ................................................................................... 84
2.5.2.2 - Interface language for the applications .......................................... 85
2.5.2.3 - Setup procedure ............................................................................ 85
2.5.3 - Running the software...................................................................... 95
2.6 - Installing optional boards.................................................................... 97

48 Chapter 2 - Installation
2.6.1 - Installing a board ............................................................................ 97

2.6.2 - Removing the board ....................................................................... 98
2.7 - Installing software options.................................................................. 99

Chapter 2 49
" PROCEDURE
The following five steps are necessary before your encoder is ready for use:
1) Install the encoder. Installation involves the following steps:
• manually set switches.
• observe certain principles.
• install the encoder in a rack.
2) Connect the encoder to other devices.
3) Switch on the device.
4) Adjust the cable corrector if the link exceeds 10m.
5) Install the control and command software.
These various operations are described in the following sections.

50 Chapter 2
2.1 - Encoder installation
2.1 - ENCODER INSTALLATION
The DBE 4110 encoder is designed for use in a horizontal position.

The On/Off switch and the power cord should be within reach so that the device can
be switched off easily.
2.1.1 - Manual switch setting
" SSEB board - Set input impedance (audio)
The four switches LEFT 1, RIGHT 1, LEFT 2 and RIGHT 2 (mark 1) set incoming
audio impedance. Each one comprises 2 switches which must be moved as a pair.
Switch Up: high impedance
Switch Down: 600Ω impedance
The default setting is 600Ω.
1 UP
Figure 2.1: SSEB board switch setting

Chapter 2 51
" MSDL and RSMAINT boards - The different elements of alarm relay closure are
shown in the following block diagram:
SSEB
MSDL 1
S1 & S2: Choice of

alarm relay mode
Alarm “CLOSED”: PB “OPEN”: PB 6
monitoring
0 = relay open 0 = relay closed
(normal) (normal)
SubD9
1 = relay closed 1 = relay open
Alarm
(alarm) (alarm)
1 = Alarm Relay
normal
(fail)
N T/A
normal switch
Unit Fail LED
1 (fail)
1 = on on Encoder
S2 front panel
RSMAINT
Figure 2.2: Alarm relay closure diagram
• Enabling/Disabling the alarm relay

In the event of a prompt alarm from the main processing board, a contact dry
loop is activated on the MSDL board. The S2 switch (RSMAINT board)
disables the alarm relay. The red LED (UNIT FAIL) comes on on the front
panel of the device to signal the presence of a prompt alarm (regardless of S2
setting).
Note: Do not forget to set the S2 switch from "Test/Alarm" back to "Normal" once the
fault has been corrected.

52 Chapter 2
• Choice of alarm relay mode

In a system configuration with several DBE 41xx devices, the user can choose
to interconnect the dry contacts of the alarm relays in series or parallel. The
setting of the two microswitches on the MSDL board determines either open or
closed contact mode:
- choosing “open contact” for the alarm relay, associated with an unack-
nowledged fault means that all dry loop contacts must be set in series,
- choosing “closed contact” for the alarm relay, associated with an unack-
nowledged fault means that all dry loop contacts must be set in parallel.
Micro-switch on
MSDL board open: PB closed: PB
Fault no yes no yes
Switch S2 left right left right left right left right
(N-T/A) (N) (T/A) (N) (T/A) (N) (T/A) (N) (T/A)
on RSMAINT
board
Comment no loop unack. ack. no loop unack. ack.
comment test fault fault comment test fault fault
Contact status closed open open closed open closed closed open
Red "UNIT off on on on off on on on
FAIL" LED
Note: The dry contact always signals an operating fault, including a power failure and
device shutdown.

Chapter 2 53
2.1.2 - Desktop installation
The DBE 4110 encoder is fitted with four small plastic feet to ensure a minimum
space of 1cm is guaranteed between the power supply of the encoder and the
desktop for safety reasons.
2.1.3 - Rack installation
Principles
" Prevent outgoing hot air being reinjected into other devices.
" Ensure an equal and acceptable air flow to the air-capture points of all devices.
" Avoid the effects due to natural convection between devices.
" Avoid short-cuts between hot and cold air and vice versa.
" Avoid transversal effects with connected racks.
" Avoid thermal pockets (obstruction of hot air).
" Check the air flow rate that will be used.
If the encoder is installed in a rack, the plastic feet can be removed.

The device should be mounted on L-profiles in the rack. These should be low
profile to ensure adequate air flow (see Figure 2.3).
Note: The DBE 4110 encoder does not feature air filters. If used in a dusty environment, a
filtered rack should be used.

54 Chapter 2
The various types of L-profile are shown below:
1) Standard L-profiles
Encoder front panel 2U
1U
1U
1U
2) Special L-profiles
Encoder front panel
Encoder front panel
Front view Side view

2cm 5mm
4cm 4cm V
V 4cm
4cm
D
D = depends on rack
3) Widened L-profiles
2cm min.
Encoder front panel
4cm max.
Figure 2.3: Possible installation types

Chapter 2 55
2.1.4 - Mains power supply and protective earth
2.1.4.1 - Power supply

" 100 - 230V AC Mains Power
• Connector
On/Off switch
fuse holder
mains connector
Figure 2.4: Mains power connector
• Fuse
Fuse characteristics: T4AH250V, dimensions 5 x 20mm, can be accessed from the
power connector.
Important: For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same
type and rating of fuse.
• Mains power supply cable

The mains cable is not supplied with the device. You are advised to use a mains
cable with the following features:
• Device end of cable: CEI320 compliant connector,
• Wire: 3x1mm2 or 18 AWG section, 10A minimum compliant with the appli-
cable standard or rules of the country where the device is installed,
• Mains outlet end of cable: plug compliant with the applicable standard or rules
of the country where the device is installed.

56 Chapter 2
• Mains supplies connecting

The equipment is pluggable type A. The building installation must feature overload
and earth fault protection and a bipolar cut-off device or a differential circuit break.
The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the country of
installation. Connection panel position in the rack must ensure that plug and power
cord are within easy reach for switching off purposes.
Ensure that the device is connected correctly. If you are in any doubt, consult a
qualified electrician.
2.1.4.2 - Connection to the techical earth

The pin to the right of the connector is used to ground the device to ensure equipo-
tential grounding between the different devices in the technical centre
2.1.4.3 - On/Off switch

While the encoder is not connected to other devices, keep the On/Off switch set to
Off.

Chapter 2 57
2.2 - Board connections
2.2 - BOARD CONNECTIONS
Once the encoder itself has been installed, the boards need to be connected.
The DBE 4110 device has five slots of 402mm depth:
- 2 x 6 U slots
- 2 x 3 U slots
- 1 x 9 U slot.
Slot 0 (9U 5TE)
Slot 4 (3U 4TE) Slot 1 (6U 4TE)
Slot 3 (3U 6TE) Slot 2 (6U 6TE)
DBE 4110
SSEB (standard)
ATADI (option) COMPIN or DPSN (option)

Alarm Relay Closure AMuSE (option) or ISMB (option)
(option)
Figure 2.5: DBE 4110 encoder rear panel
Note:
You are strongly recommended not to leave empty slots without blank panels as ventilation
could be impaired.

58 Chapter 2
2.2.1 - SSEB board (slot 0)
SSEB board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Connector Description
# AUDIO IN
ANALOGUE
2 stereo audio / 2 double mono inputs are available on a 15-pin
female Sub-D connector.
Characteristics:
• Balanced signal,
• Female Sub-D connector,
Contact Signal Contact Signal
1 L1
9 /L1
2 GNDL1 10 GND
3 R1 11 /R1
4 GNDR1 12 GND
5 L2 13 /L2
6 GNDL2
7 R2 14 GND
8 GNDR2 15 /R2
• Input impedance: 600Ω / 18kΩ (manual switching on the board),

• Inputs without transformer.
The DBE 4110 is provided with a SubD - 4 XLR adapter cord. Each
channel is assigned an XLR connector, as described in the following
table.
XLR colour Channel

brown Left channel 1 (L1, /L1, GNDL1)
red Right channel 1 (R1, /R1, GNDR1)
orange Left channel 2 (L2, /L2, GNDL2)
yellow Right channel 2 (R2, /R2, GNDR2)

Chapter 2 59
SSEB board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
$ SDI IN The "SDI input" connector receives a 270Mbit/s SDI signal in serial
format (625 and 525 lines).
Characteristics:
• Female BNC coaxial connector,
• Impedance: 75Ω.
Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a
75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or
equivalent. Cable length is 0-200m.
% SERIAL 1
RS232/485
The "SERIAL 1 RS232/485 syn./async. private data" connector is
used to inject low flow digital data into the DBE 4110.
Characteristics in RS232 asynchronous mode:
• Female 9-pin Sub-D connector,
Signal Contact Contact Signal

TX CK 1
6 /TX CK
TX 2
7 /TX
RX 3
8 /RX
RX CK 4
9 /RX CK
GND 5
For RS232 asynchronous mode, only pins 2, 3 & 5 are used.

For other modes, contact NEXTREAM.

60 Chapter 2
SSEB board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
& LAN
10BaseT
Depending on the type of the SSEB board, the LEDs have different
signalling (see below). To know the board type installed in the
equipment, select the OTHER/Tools/About/Information command
on the device front panel. The board type (HWD 1,2 or 4) is given
on the third line.
The Ethernet link is dedicated to device supervision.
This link is also used for injecting ECMs and low bitrate data (64
kb/s).
Characteristics:
• 10BaseT connector according to IEEE 802.3 standard,
• Rated transmission bitrate: 10Mb/s,
• Maximum cable length: 10 metres (unshielded twisted pairs),
• 3 LEDs to indicate link operation.
K
N
Rx
Tx
LI
Ethernet LEDs, HWD 4 type

Rx = Rx frames received by the device
Tx = Tx frames sent by the device
LINK = link on (carrier detected).

Chapter 2 61
SSEB board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
& LAN
10BaseT
Or
TY
IC
RI
FF
LA
K
A
N
TR
PO
LI
Ethernet LEDs, HWD 1 or 2 type
TRAFFIC ON= Rx and/or Tx frames exchanged

POLARITY ON= Rx pair polarity correct
LINK = link level set (test pulses exchanged with partner)).
Cables used:
For a direct connection to an operating station, use a cross cable to
link the Tx pairs of the Encoder’s RJ45 connector to the Rx pairs of
the PC’s RJ45 connector.
The cable delivered with the device is a cross cable.
Ethernet 10BaseT cross cable
DBE 4110 PC
For connection to a hub, you are generally advised to use a straight

(point to point) cable as crossing often occurs in the HUB which
then bears the X symbol. Please refer to the Hub User Manual.
Ethernet 10BaseT straight cable
DBE 4110
HUB
Ethernet 10BaseT straight cable x
PC

62 Chapter 2
SSEB board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
' SERIAL
RS485
2 The RS485 9-pin Sub-D connector marked “SERIAL 2 RS485” is
used to control the Newtec modulator.
Characteristics:
• Female 9-pin Sub-D connector,

reserved 1
6 reserved
RX 2
7 /RX
TX 3
8 /TX
reserved 4
9 reserved
reserved 5
• Asynchronous RS485,
• Maximum transmission rate: 38400 bauds.
For other uses, contact NEXTREAM.

Chapter 2 63
SSEB board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
( PCR OUT Characteristics:

SubD 9 connector

DATA 1
6 /DATA
CK 2
7 /CK
WIN 3
8 /WIN
GND 5
The PCR is computed on 42 bits, at a 27MHz frequency. The 33 msb

(most significant bits) are the base and the 9 lsb (least significant
bits) the extension. The "PCR out" connector only sends the 33 msb.
PCR recurrence is 26.5 hours.
1 34 76
CLOCK
6.75 MHz
PCR WIN
SERIAL
PCR base 33 bits
PCR base 42 undefined bits
CLOCK
PCR WIN
SERIAL B32 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B1 B0
PCR base
Zoom Zoom
) TS ASI IN This connector accepts a signal in TS serial format (ASI mode).

Characteristics:
equivalent.

64 Chapter 2
SSEB board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
* TS ASI OUT Three connectors deliver a signal in TS serial format (ASI mode).
Characteristics:
Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled
with a 75Ω male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.:
R142085000) or equivalent.

Chapter 2 65
2.2.2 - DPSN board (slot 1)
DPSN board
1 2 3
# COMPOSITE
VIDEO IN
The "composite video input" connector receives an analogue compo-
site video input signal.
Characteristics:
equivalent.
$ GAIN,
FREQ and
See section 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input -
for information on using the GAIN and FREQ potentiometers and
ON the meaning of the "ON" LED.
% MONITOR The MONITOR output is used for adjusting cable correction, parti-
cularly in the case of links exceeding 10 m.
Characteristics:
equivalent.

66 Chapter 2
2.2.3 - COMPIN board (slot 1)
COMPIN board
1 2 3 4
# COMPOSITE
VIDEO IN
The "composite video input" connector receives an analogue compo-
site video input signal.
Characteristics:
equivalent.
$ GAIN,
FREQ and
See section 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input -
for information on using the GAIN and FREQ potentiometers and
EQ the meaning of the "EQ" LED.
% MON OUT The MONITOR output is used for adjusting cable correction, parti-
cularly in the case of links exceeding 10 m, or for
monitoring purposes.
The MONITOR output is not suitable for measurements on the
signal.
Characteristics:

Chapter 2 67
COMPIN board
1 2 3 4
& REF IN The REF IN connector can receive either a composite video input
signal or a black burst to allow video input stream synchronisation.
If the board is in synchroniser mode, but without any REF IN signal,
then the board synchronises the video input stream with an internal
reference.
Characteristics:
equivalent.

68 Chapter 2
2.2.4 - AMUSE board (slot 2)
AMuSE board
1 2 3 4 5 6
# SDI IN The SDI 270 Mbit/s serial input features up to eight embedded
stereo audio channels. This interface has the following features:
• SDI compliant with SMPTE 259M (4:2:2 Component part),
• Embedding compliant with SMPTE 272M.
Characteristics:
equivalent.

Chapter 2 69
AMuSE board
1 2 3 4 5 6
# SDI OUT Description:

The AMuSE board duplicates the incoming SDI signal to supply
the SSEB board, thereby avoiding the need for an external distribu-
tion amplifier.
DBE 41xx
Up to 4 AES3
on
Backplane
SDI in Optional
AMuSE board
SDI loop
through
SSEB
board
TS Out
"SDI OUT" is an active loop-through of the SDI input, after signal

reshaping. This copy is used, either to monitor the input, or to
cascade the AMuSE board with a video compression board (SSEB).
For these 2 applications you do not require a long cable.
"SDI out" is compliant with the 259M SMPTE standard, for a
maximum cable length of 50 metres.
Characteristics:
equivalent.

70 Chapter 2
AMuSE board
1 2 3 4 5 6
$ AUD
Bal
DIN The digital audio inputs are an alternative solution to SDI
embedded audio.
Description:
Two sets of connectors/standards are available to the user: SubD15
and AES IN 1 to 4.
Characteristics:
• balanced: a specific cable is provided with the board. This
cable links the SubD15 connector to 4 XLR female connectors
(110Ω, balanced).
1 IN1+
9 IN1-
2 ShieldIN1 10
IN2+ GND
3 11 IN2-
4 ShieldIN2 12 GND
5 IN3+ 13 IN3-
6 ShieldIN3
7 IN4+ 14 GND
8 ShieldIN4 15 IN4-
Each XLR has its own colour, as described in the following table:
XLR colour Channels

brown Digital stereo (IN1-, IN1+, ShieldIN1)
red Digital stereo (IN2-, IN2+, ShieldIN2)
orange Digital stereo (IN3-, IN3+, ShieldIN3)
yellow Digital stereo (IN4-, IN4+, ShieldIN4)
% AUD DIN
Unbal
• unbalanced: four BNC female connectors, compliant with
SMPTE 276M (75Ω, 1V unbalanced).

Chapter 2 71
AMuSE board
1 2 3 4 5 6
& CTRL OUT Description:

This interface is reserved for controlling and monitoring an external
audio encoder, a Dolby AC-3 Multichannel Encoder (DP569).
DBE 4110 Encoder
ctrl/cmd
Up to 3 AES3
Backplane
Dolby AC-3
Gen lock AMuSE
Surround encoder
board
DP569 IEC1937 in AES3 TS out
Ethernet SSEB ctrl + clk

board
TS output
Characteristics:
• SubD9 female connector, asynchronous, RS 485.

GND 1
6 GND
RX- 2
7 RX+
TX+ 3
8 TX-
GND 4
9 GND
NC 5

72 Chapter 2
AMuSE board
1 2 3 4 5 6
' REF OUT Description:

This interface is used to synchronise an external audio encoder. It
allows the external Dolby AC-3 encoder to be locked onto the video
clock.
Characteristics:
• generates muted PCM samples at 48 kHz, and locked onto the
video clock of the associated SSEB board,
• Female BNC coaxial connector, compliant with SMPTE 276M
(75Ω, 1V, unbalanced).
( LED Not relevant

Chapter 2 73
2.2.5 - ISMB board (slot 2)
ISMB board
1 2 3 4
# REMOTE The "REMOTE" RS485 connector is used for the control and
command link.
Characteristics:
Female Sub-D 9-pin connector:

1
6 TX
2
7
/RX 3
8
/TX 4
9 RX
GND 5
The cable is delivered with the device. Pay attention to the direction
of this cable.
$ IF LO Characteristics:
• Impedance: 75Ω.,
• Frequency : 100MHz.

74 Chapter 2
ISMB board
1 2 3 4
% IF OUT Characteristics:
& LOUT
BAND Characteristics:

Chapter 2 75
2.2.6 - ATADI board (slot 4)
ATADI board
1 2
# AES IN Two digital audios can be input on the ATADI board, either on a
SubD (balanced) or on XLR connectors (unbalanced). The choice
between BNC and XLR is user-programmable for each audio.
Description:
This connector accepts the two digital audio inputs in balanced form.
A specific cable is shipped with the board. This cable links the
SubD15 connector to 4 XLR female connectors (the same type of
cable as for the AMuSE board or the SSEB board) but only two XLR
connectors are used.
Characteristics:
• Female SubD15 connector,
1 IN1+
9 IN1-
2 IN1G 10
IN2+ GND
3 11 IN2-
4 IN2G 12 GND
5 NC 13 NC
6 GND
7 NC 14 GND
8 GND 15 NC
• Impedance: 110 Ω,
• Balanced.
Each XLR has its own colour, as described in the following table.
XLR colour Channel
brown Digital stereo (IN1-, IN1+, IN1GND)
red Digital stereo (IN2-, IN2+, IN2GND)

76 Chapter 2
ATADI board
1 2
$ AES IN Description:
These connectors accept the two digital audio inputs in unbalanced
form.
Characteristics:
• two 75Ω female BNC connectors,
• compliant with SMPTE 276 M standard (75Ω,
1V unbalanced).
Left BNC input is linked to SSEB audio encoder no. 1.
Right BNC input is linked to SSEB audio encoder no. 2.
equivalent.

Chapter 2 77
2.2.7 - Alarm Relay Closure
This function is implemented by two boards:
RSMAINT board
1
0
6
1 2 3 4
# Coding wheel (should be set to 0 for normal operation)
$ ALARM N - T/A switch (N: normal, T/A: test-acknowledgement)
% RESET RESET pushbutton (reserved for maintenance)
& RS232 Male SubD 9 connector (reserved for maintenance)

78 Chapter 2
ALARM (MSDL) board (slot 3)
1 2
# STATISTI-
CAL
SubD 9 connector (for DBE 4130 only)
MULTI-
PLEXING
$ ALARM Alarm output for remoting prompt alarms. In a system configura-

tion, the alarm outputs of the different devices can be grouped by
paralleling the contacts which are normally open (i.e. when there are
no prompt alarms) or serialising the normally closed contacts. The
configuration of the "normally open" or "normally closed" contacts
depends on the setting of two switches on the alarm board.
Characteristics:
SubD 9 connector

DL1 1
6 DL2
NC 2
7 NC
NC 3
8 NC
NC 4
9 NC
NC 5

Chapter 2 79
2.2.8 - Modulator Control&Command
A 0.5m length cable is supplied with this option, N41SM0DCAH.

The two ends of the cable are different. The labels on the cable show which end
should be connected to the encoder and which to the modulator. The cable features
110Ω termination resistance.

80 Chapter 2
2.3 - Switching on the device
2.3 - SWITCHING ON THE DEVICE
Ensure that the device is properly grounded before power-up.

On the rear panel, connect the power cable and turn the power switch to ON. When
the device is switched on, check that the green "POWER" LED on the front panel is
on. If not, refer to the "Troubleshooting" chapter.
When switched on, the device runs an autotest after which the main screen is
displayed (see Welcome and main screens page 108).
Caution:
• When the DBE 4110 encoder is first switched on, the non volatile RAM is initialised with
a configuration not defining any service. It is necessary to create or recall a service. Refer
to the "PC operation - Control & Command software" chapter.
• When the device is switched on, the last active configuration is loaded.

Chapter 2 81
2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input
2.4 - CABLE CORRECTOR IN THE CASE OF A COMPOSITE

INPUT
The cable corrector is useful for links exceeding 10m.
2.4.1 - DPSN board
Switch SE1 (in the figure of the DPSN board below) is used to adjust the FREQ.
and GAIN potentiometers for cable correction. When the settings are active, the
green "ON" LED is on and the bandwidth and the gain can be adjusted.
To adjust the cable corrector:

• switch off the device,
• extract the board - on extraction and insertion of the board, check that the metal
joints that ensure electromagnetic continuity are correctly positioned,
• set the SE1 switch to 1 - in setting 2 (factory setting), the SE1 switch deactivates
the cable corrector,
• insert the board,
• inject a multiburst signal, through the cable to be equalised, at the composite
video input,
• connect a monitor to the MONITOR access on the board,
• increase signal amplitude to the required level with the GAIN setting,
• adjust the bandwidth of the cable corrector with the FREQ. setting.

82 Chapter 2
C607 P1_1
C615 C614 J2 J1
R7
C7
R5
DS4
MA1
K J3
S11
J4 P1_2
TP11 C617 C616
S10
H3 L500
L600
H1
DS2 C606 C605
MA31
TP10
C611
C612 C603
K MA32
C600 R703
C503
F500
R609 R604
C702
TP600 C500 11
C609
R610
R173
MA36 MA520 MA500
Q180 C172
MA17 MA20 L520
L25
R700 R709
C613 R24
14
C523
C173
R717
MA2 R642
R640
P1
F520
R182
R184
L170
C190
R180
C691 17
C695TP687
C643
TP20 MA33 MA18 TP685 SE680 C520
DS1 Q641 Q640 MA19 MA21 MN53 TP680
R649
R644
11 23 23
SE1 K SE1 TP2 C191 TP684 TP681
C642
R648
C641
TP686
MN2 MN4 MN24 TP682
FL1 MN5 TP683
FL2
MN25 MN26 TP9
MA37
MN46
C114
C113
S13
TP620
C629
C620
C125
C631 MA34
C628 MA10 TP641
C621
MA16 C630 CR110 FL100 C93R77 C647 TP640
MA15 MN52
MA8 MN27 MN22
C627R164
R146
MA11
C624
TP100
C120
C118 TP642 MN20

R622
C626
C119
C282
C111 FL101
MA13 MA14 MA28 MX1
C625 MN8 L630 MN19
MN33
GAIN
MA12 MN37
R248
L3
R620
L280
MN51
SE71
R192
R73C286
L4 MA35 MN21
L6
C176
MN43
MA22 C83
L1
L2
FREQ R141 TP3

R71 MA7
MN15
MN23
ON DS150 TP15
MN32
MN50 MN28 MN30 TP4

K MA30 MN40
TP14 MN14
MONITOR MN41
MN18
S5
S4
C693
MN6
F540
S2 540
MN31 S3 TP8 L540
Figure 2.6: Part of DPSN board
2.4.2 - COMPIN board
Switches S1 and S3 (in the figure of the COMPIN board below) are used to adjust
the FREQ. and GAIN potentiometers for cable correction. When the settings are
active, the green “EQ” LED is on and the bandwidth and the gain can be adjusted.
To adjust the cable corrector:

• switch off the device,
• extract the board - on extraction and insertion of the board, check that the metal
joints that ensure electromagnetic continuity are correctly positioned,
• set S1 and S3 switches together towards the MONITOR connector - set S1 and S3
switches together towards the Composite video IN connector (factory setting), the
switches deactivate the cable corrector,
• insert the board,

Chapter 2 83
• inject a multiburst signal, through the cable to be equalised, at the composite

video input,
• connect a monitor to the MONITOR access on the board,
• increase signal amplitude to the required level with the GAIN setting,
• adjust the bandwidth of the cable corrector with the FREQ. setting.
S1/S3
FREQ
EQ
GAIN
MONITOR
Figure 2.7: Part of COMPIN board

84 Chapter 2
2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software
2.5 - INSTALLING STAND-ALONE SOFTWARE
2.5.1 - Scope
The stand-alone software supplied with the encoder is designed to control a single
encoder.
The stand-alone software comprises a set of basic applications for declaring,
configuring and supervising the encoder.
2.5.2 - Installation
2.5.2.1 - Environment
The software runs with Windows NT4.0 and Windows 2000 operating systems.
To run the {Alarm Help} and {Event Log} applications, the "Interbase 6" database
manager must be installed. This manager is included in the "Stand-Alone" software
and can be installed when the "Stand-Alone" software itself is first installed.
Note: with WINDOWS NT or WINDOWS 2000 operating systems, "Administrator"

rights are needed to install the database manager.
Minimum requirements for the PC designated to support the software are:

• 300 MHz Pentium II© microprocessor,
• WINDOWS NT™ version 4 or WINDOWS 2000 operating system,
• ETHERNET© board,
• TCP/IP command interface (MicroSoft TCP/IP-32©),
• mouse,
• colour monitor with 17" screen, SVGA resolution (800 x 600).
Note: release 7.0 of the software requires a system library (comctl32.dll) which may not be
up-to-date on certain Windows NT 4.0 versions (in particular on service pack 3 with
Internet Explorer 3).
The software installation program tests the version number of this library and offers to

Chapter 2 85
install a Microsoft patch to correct the problem.

"Administrator" rights and a PC reboot are needed to install this patch.
2.5.2.2 - Interface language for the applications

The interface language of the {Alarm Help} application corresponds to the one
chosen in the Windows Control Panel (Regional Settings WinNT or Regional
Options Win2000) before installation, i.e. French for French-speaking countries and
English for the others.
For the other applications, French and English will be installed systematically and
the required language can be chosen using the Regional Settings application in the
Windows Control Panel.
Figure 2.8: Regional Settings (WinNT) or Regional Options (Win 2000)
2.5.2.3 - Setup procedure

The software is supplied on CD-ROM.
1. Insert the CD-ROM in the PC drive.
2. Double-click on the Setup.exe file in the Stand-Alone/Disk1 directory to begin
installing the software. The Wizard is then loaded to help you install the

86 Chapter 2
software.
Figure 2.9: Loading the Wizard
3. If release 7.0 of the "Stand-Alone" software is being installed on the PC for the
first time and the user rights are not "Administator", the following window is
displayed:
Clicking on OK displays the following dialogue box.
Clicking on OK displays Figure 2.22: "Stand-Alone" software setup complete. The

software has not been installed.
4. If release 7.0 of the "Stand-Alone" software has already been installed or the
PC user rights are "Administrator", the first dialogue box displayed is used to
select a software installation directory. A default directory is proposed.

Chapter 2 87
Figure 2.10: Default directory
5. To choose another directory, click on Browse and indicate the directory and
the path (e.g., c:\dvb\dbs2930v6.5\V65program).
Figure 2.11: Changing directories

88 Chapter 2
6. If the directory does not already exist, confirm whether or not you want it to
be created.
Figure 2.12: Creating a new directory
Figure 2.13: New directory
7. Click on Next>.
8. The following dialogue box is used to validate DBS 2930 software options.
This dialogue box is not used in Stand-Alone mode.

Chapter 2 89
Figure 2.14: Validating DBS 2930 options
9. Do not fill in this window and click on Next.

10.A new dialogue box is displayed. It is used to rename the directory in the
Program Folder which contains the icons representing the various software
applications. Both the icons and this directory are automatically generated
during the software setup phase.

90 Chapter 2
Figure 2.15: Icon directory
11.Click on Next>.
Setup is run (file loading and icon creation).
Figure 2.16: Running setup
12.When setup is complete and if the database manager has already been
installed, Figure 2.22: "Stand-Alone" software setup complete is displayed. If
version 7.0 of the software is being installed on the PC for the first time, the

Chapter 2 91
"Interbase" database manager installation initialisation window is displayed.
Figure 2.17: Initialising database manager installation
The following window is then displayed:
Figure 2.18: Database manager welcome screen
13.Click on Next to display the database manager user licence agreement screen.

92 Chapter 2
Figure 2.19: Licence agreement
14.Read the contents of the licence and click on I Agree to begin installing the
manager.
Figure 2.20: Installing the database manager
The following window is displayed to show that setup is complete:

Chapter 2 93
Figure 2.21: Database manager setup complete
15.Click on Finish to display the "Stand-Alone" software setup complete

window.
Figure 2.22: "Stand-Alone" software setup complete
16.Click on Finish to exit "Stand-Alone" software setup.

94 Chapter 2
Figure 2.23: Installation directory contents
Figure 2.24: Software application icons

Chapter 2 95
2.5.3 - Running the software
After running WINDOWS on the operating PC and opening the directory

containing the software applications, the following panel is displayed:
Figure 2.25: Icon display
The icons represent the “Stand-Alone” software applications.

The following order must be observed when running the software:
1. Open a session by double-clicking on the Equipment Interface icon to run the
{Equipment Interface} application.
Notes:
1. To shut down a session, it is advisable to close this application after all the others,
otherwise a "Some Applications are still connected; Do you really want to quit
anyway?" warning message will ask you to confirm application shut down.
2. It is advisable to leave this application open when the device is being used, even if
no other application is run.
2. Declare the device from the {Equipment Installation} application. This step
is unnecessary if the device has already been declared in a previous session.
3. Set the technical configuration of the device from the {Technical
Configuration} application. This step is unnecessary if the device has already
been set in a previous session.
4. Run the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application to monitor the device.
5. The {Event Log} application is used to view events occurring on the Encoder
(alarms, reboot, etc.).
6. The {Alarm Help} application explains the meaning of alarms displayed in

96 Chapter 2
the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application.
Notes:
1. The {Download Embedded Software} application is used by NEXTREAM to
download embedded software.
2. The {ATM Connect Management} application does not concern the DBE 4130
Encoder/ADSL SuperEncoder.

Chapter 2 97
2.6 - Installing optional boards
2.6 - INSTALLING OPTIONAL BOARDS
2.6.1 - Installing a board
SSEB (standard)
ATADI (option) COMPIN or DPSN (option)

Alarm Relay Closure AMuSE or ISMB (option) + blank panel,
(option) see note
Figure 2.26: DBE 4110 rear panel
• Switch off the device.

• Remove the blank panel.
• Carefully slide in the board whilst keeping the extractors open.
• When the board is nearly all the way in, start closing the extractors by pushing
them towards the centre of the board. Check that the metal joins that ensure
electromagnetic continuity are correctly positioned and that the centring pins
are aligned with the centring holes. Press gently to engage the connectors.
• When the board is completely inserted, secure it with the screws.
• Switch the device on.
• To change the hardware configuration, switch to "local" mode in the
OTHER/Tools/Control menu on the front panel.
• Declare the board via the DBE 4110’s front panel
("OTHER/Tools/Option/Hardware" menu).
• Reboot the device.
Note: A 2TE blank panel is delivered with the 4TE AMuSE board to fill 6TE slot 2.

98 Chapter 2
2.6 - Installing optional boards
2.6.2 - Removing the board
• Switch off the device.

• Follow the installation procedure in reverse order.
• Undeclare the board via the DBE 4110’s front panel.
Note: A blank panel must be set in the empty slot.

Chapter 2 99
2.7 - Installing software options
2.7 - INSTALLING SOFTWARE OPTIONS
If the options are delivered with the device, they are directly available for the
operator without operation.
If you order the options after device purchase, please follow the procedure below:
• When you order an option, please supply your device code (see section
3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen page 146),
• NEXTREAM will return you a special 6-digit key (which is unique and can
only be used for one device) and a sticker to stick on the device,
• To install the option, enter this key (see section 3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools /
Option screen page 143).
Note: It is necessary to close and open the {Technical Configuration} application when a
new software option is installed.

100 Chapter 2
2.7 - Installing software options
BLANK PAGE

Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operation 101
Chapter 3
Front Panel Operation
3.1 - Operating principle ............................................................................ 103
3.2 - Front panel overview ......................................................................... 104
3.3 - Welcome and main screens .............................................................. 108
3.4 - Ergonomy............................................................................................ 110

3.4.1 - Operating mode ............................................................................ 110
3.4.2 - Changing parameters ON AIR...................................................... 112
3.5 - External modulator connection ........................................................ 113
3.6 - Menu tree ............................................................................................ 114
3.7 - Sections associated with the menu.................................................. 117
3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens........................... 118

3.8.1 - Main screen .................................................................................. 118
3.8.2 - TRANSMIT screen........................................................................ 119
3.8.3 - PRESET screen............................................................................ 120
3.8.3.1 - PRESET / Recall screen .............................................................. 120
3.8.3.2 - PRESET / Store screen ............................................................... 122
3.8.3.3 - PRESET / Erase screen .............................................................. 123
3.8.4 - MOD.SETUP screen..................................................................... 124
3.8.4.1 - MOD.SETUP / Tx O/P screen...................................................... 124
3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen ............................................................... 125
3.8.4.3 - MOD.SETUP / L-Band screen ..................................................... 126
3.8.4.4 - MOD.SETUP / Convolution screen .............................................. 127
3.8.4.5 - MOD.SETUP / Symbol_R screen ................................................ 127
3.8.4.6 - MOD.SETUP / Info/Bandwidth screen ......................................... 128
3.8.4.7 - MOD.SETUP / Roll_off screen..................................................... 129
3.8.4.8 - MOD.SETUP / Spectrum screen ................................................. 130
3.8.5 - ENC.O/P screen ........................................................................... 130
3.8.6 - ENCODING screen....................................................................... 131
3.8.6.1 - ENCODING / Video screen.......................................................... 131

102 Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operation
3.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen .......................................................... 133

3.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen............................................................ 134
3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen .................................................................. 135
3.8.8 - ALARM screen ............................................................................. 136
3.8.9 - OTHER screen ............................................................................. 137
3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen................................................................. 137
3.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen .............................................................. 138
3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen ............................................... 138
3.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen .................................................. 139
3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen ................................................................. 141
3.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen.................................................. 141
3.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen............................................ 141
3.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen.................................................. 143
3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen................................................... 143
3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen.................................................... 146
3.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen ..................................................... 148

Chapter 3 103
3.1 - Operating principle
3.1 - OPERATING PRINCIPLE
In stand-alone configuration, supervision is carried out from the front panel

(described in this chapter) and from a PC terminal connected to the DBE 4110 by an
Ethernet link and equipped with "Stand-alone" software supplied with the
equipment (described in the following chapter) or Fast DSNG software (described
in the chapter immediately afterwards). Front panel operation is designed to take
into consideration the operating conditions of DSNG operators (Service Providers
using the device for straightforward event coverage or the more complex occasional
links).
The following sections describe the control / command menu tree of the DSNG
DBE 4110 encoder.
Caution: When a parameter is changed by the supervision applications, the front panel
display is not updated, it is necessary to validate the parameters.
47232437AK01 THOMSOM DBE 4110

104 Chapter 3
3.2 - Front panel overview
3.2 - FRONT PANEL OVERVIEW
The front panel has two operating modes, supported by a specific software process,
REMOTE and LOCAL. In REMOTE mode, only access to DBE 4110 state is
available, and no changes may be made to operation. In LOCAL mode, the operator
has full control over signal transmission and compression parameters. The mode
changing procedure is explained in 3.4 - Ergonomy.
The front panel has an LCD, five function keys and a set of 4 LEDs.
MPEG-2
DBE 4110 ESC
DVB SHIFT
ENT
DBE 4110 front panel
THOMSOM DBE 4110 47232437AK01

Chapter 3 105
LEDs
The LEDs provide a visual indication of the operating state and/or settings of the
equipment. They are interpreted as follows:
LED COLOUR DESCRIPTION

POWER green Device on
UNIT FAIL red Prompt alarm preventing operation
WARNING orange Deferred alarm not preventing operation or initialisation
phase
REMOTE green Remote mode selected and
control/command session by a remote operating unit
Keypad
ESC
SHIFT
ENT

106 Chapter 3
Key functions are as follows:
KEYS FUNCTION
ESC Ignore modifications or go back to menu above
⇐ Move cursor left, or upwards in a list
⇒ Move cursor right or downwards in a list
ENT Select item, increment alphanumeric value of a digit
when bracketed and save changes
SHIFT and ENT Select a digit, decrement alphanumeric value of the
digit when bracketed
ENT and ⇐ or ⇒ Enhance or reduce LCD contrast
Note:
The SHIFT and ENT keys cannot be used to select the IP address.
A beep sounds if the user makes keystroke errors or enters erroneous values:
ENT: BEEP if the editing mode is not allowed.
⇐: BEEP if no previous choice.
⇒: BEEP if no further choice.
LCD presentation:
The LCD features 4 lines of 40 characters each.
First line: displays the menu level,
when followed by "/" - displays the current sub-menu level and sub-menu of the
parameters displayed below.
when followed by ":" - current parameter value of associated menu item is
displayed.
Second line: displays various messages (blank, question, parameter, etc.).

Chapter 3 107
Third line: displays menu item or new value to be selected and entered
Or, at sub-menu level, displays one item with its current value
Fourth line:
at menu level: menu item, using the SHIFT key and moving the cursor
at sub-menu level: displays one item with its current value
on editing page: context-sensitive help (e.g. parameter range) or error message
Menu tree navigation and editing principle

The symbols guide operation and the markers help to locate and/or select displayed
items.
SYMBOL INDICATION
........ selection cursor moved with left/right arrow keys

selection pointer moved with left/right arrow keys to move up and
down menus, then press ENT for editing menu
fixed marker for upward extension of menu/parameter list
fixed marker for downward extension of menu/parameter list

108 Chapter 3
3.3 - Welcome and main screens
3.3 - WELCOME AND MAIN SCREENS
When the DBE 4110 is switched on, the following screen is displayed:
*** Basic system check . . . OK

*** Bootstrap version 2.45 - 16-Dec-99
(32768 Kbytes DRAM installed)
(c) 1999 - THOMSON BROADCAST SYSTEMS
Figure 1: Welcome screen
*** Autotest in progress ***
This is followed by the main screens:

- the start menu:
/ Root :
Transmit Preset Mod.Setup Enc.O/P

Encoding Scrambling Alarm Other
Figure 2: Main screen
The selection cursor ... moves with the ⇐ and ⇒ keys on the third and the
fourth lines.
Press the ENT key on the keypad to select the required command, then the relevant
sub-menu is displayed.

Chapter 3 109
3.3 - Welcome and main screens
- the default window:

After a reboot, the LCD displays a default window, which gives the configuration
parameters.
/ [station name] MOD OFF NON INVERTED

6.11132 Ms / s QPSK 3/4 204
PAL 420 0.032000 Mb / s ALARM
A1 - OFF A2 - OFF IF 70.000 MHz FREE
Note:
The default screen displays 0.032 Mb/s even if no video component is generated.
The station name field directly refers to the service name.
Press ESC to switch between the start menu and the default window.
After 3 minutes without any action on the keypad, the start menu automatically
goes back to the default window.
There are several warning windows: when the operator wants to quit a screen
without saving or wants to confirm saving.
When "ALARM" flashes press ENT for direct access to the "Alarm" menu, then
ESC to return to the initial state to correct the source of any alarms.

110 Chapter 3
3.4 - Ergonomy
3.4 - ERGONOMY
3.4.1 - Operating mode
The functions available on the front panel vary according to the type of connection
which may be a LOCAL connection (both consult and modify operations are
authorised) or a REMOTE connection (only consult mode is authorised).
To change operating modes (to change from REMOTE mode to LOCAL mode or
vice versa), proceed as follows:
1. Go to the start menu (press ESC).
The LCD screen offers the following options
/ Root :

2. Press the ⇒ or ⇐ key, move the cursor to the Other field, then press the ENT key.
The following screen appears:
Root / Other :
Setup Monitor Tools
3. Select the Tools field, then press the ENT key.
Other / Tools :

Chapter 3 111
3.4 - Ergonomy
Control Ip Address Reboot Option

About Time
4. The cursor will be on the CONTROL field, press ENT.
Tools / Control : LOCAL
Control : LOCAL
Switch to local mode
The first line features the current value (in this case LOCAL mode).
To change the value, click on the ⇒ key. The choice of mode is LOCAL or
REMOTE.
• Click on the ENT key. The following screen appears:
ARE YOU SURE?
(ENT) = YES (ESC) = NO
For confirmation, press the ENT key.

For cancellation, press the ESC key.
• Press the ESC key:
EXIT WITHOUT SAVING
• Go back to the Control screen.

112 Chapter 3
3.4 - Ergonomy
3.4.2 - Changing parameters ON AIR
The encoder has a transmission interrupt/restore mechanism in the event of a

parameter change On Air. If you edit essential transmission parameters On Air
transmission is stopped. Information is displayed on the warning screen.

Chapter 3 113
3.5 - External modulator connection
3.5 - EXTERNAL MODULATOR CONNECTION
When an external modulator is connected, IF access is available and it is possible to

control RF depending on the output modulator (IF, L, Ku, C). The possible level
range is -35 to -5 dBm.

114 Chapter 3
3.6 - Menu tree
3.6 - MENU TREE
The following page illustrates the menu tree with all the options.

Chapter 3 115
3.6 - Menu tree
MAIN
TRANSMIT PRESET MOD.SETUP ENC.O/P ENCODING SCRAMBLING ALARM OTHER
IF
L-Band
RECALL TX O/P VIDEO SETUP MONITOR TOOLS
IF Freq
STORE IF Low Level AUDIO ASI I/P OUTPUT CONTROL

Nom Level
L-Band
ERASE L-BAND DATA S_ID INPUT IP ADDRESS
Low Level
Nom Level
CONVOLUTION Osc Band
FRAMING REBOOT
C/Ku Freq
SYMBOL_R STATION NAME OPTION
INFO.BNDWDTH MSDL ABOUT
ROLL_OFF TIME
SPECTRUM

116 Chapter 3
3.6 - Menu tree
BLANK PAGE

Chapter 3 117
3.7 - Sections associated with the menu
3.7 - SECTIONS ASSOCIATED WITH THE MENU
3.8.2 - TRANSMIT screen

3.8.3 - PRESET screen 3.8.3.1 - PRESET / Recall screen
3.8.3.2 - PRESET / Store screen
3.8.3.3 - PRESET / Erase screen
3.8.4 - MOD.SETUP screen 3.8.4.1 - MOD.SETUP / Tx O/P screen
3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen
3.8.4.3 - MOD.SETUP / L-Band screen
3.8.4.4 - MOD.SETUP / Convolution screen
3.8.4.5 - MOD.SETUP / Symbol_R screen
3.8.4.6 - MOD.SETUP / Info/Bandwidth screen
3.8.4.7 - MOD.SETUP / Roll_off screen
3.8.4.8 - MOD.SETUP / Spectrum screen
3.8.5 - ENC.O/P screen
3.8.6 - ENCODING screen 3.8.6.1 - ENCODING / Video screen
3.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen
3.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen
3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen
3.8.8 - ALARM screen List of alarms
3.8.9 - OTHER screen 3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen
3.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen
3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen
3.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen
3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen
3.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen
3.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen
3.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen
3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen
3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen
3.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen

118 Chapter 3
3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens
3.8 - DESCRIPTION OF THE MENU AND ASSOCIATED SCREENS
3.8.1 - Main screen
/ Root :

When the cursor is placed on the last parameter Other, a beep is emitted. By
pressing the right arrow key, the cursor goes back to the Transmit parameter.
Otherwise, the left arrow key takes the cursor back to Alarm, Scrambling, etc.

Chapter 3 119
3.8.2 - TRANSMIT screen
• In the main screen, select the TRANSMIT field and press the ENT key.
• The TRANSMIT menu appears:
Transmit / IF: CARRIER OFF
IF : CARRIER OFF
The output is disabled
The TRANSMIT menu offers the option between CARRIER OFF, PURE
CARRIER LOW LEVEL, PURE CARRIER NOM LEVEL and MODULATION
ON by clicking with the right/left arrow key.
Note: In the IF area between the selection cursor, only one value is displayed at a time,
you can search within the list by pressing the right or left arrow keys as many times as
necessary.
For a PURE CARRIER LOW LEVEL transmission, the range level is -25.0 to
-5dBm in 0.5 steps. When PURE CARRIER LOW LEVEL is selected, press ENT
to set the low level then ENT to validate.
For a PURE CARRIER NOM LEVEL transmission, the range level is the same.
When the MODULATION ON is selected, press ENT to adjust the nominal level,
then ENT to validate.
In any case, the values are updated in the Mod.Setup menu.
• Select the parameter in the IF area.
The scrolling order is: CARRIER OFF, PURE CARRIER LOW LEVEL,
PURE CARRIER NOM LEVEL, MODULATION ON.
• Press the ENT key.
Caution: No operator acknowledgement is requested.
Note: Whatever the modulator state is, before rebooting, it will be CARRIER OFF when
the unit is switched on again.

120 Chapter 3
3.8.3 - PRESET screen
In the main screen, select the PRESET field and press the ENT key.
Root / Preset :
Recall Store Erase
The menu offers the possibility of recalling configurations, storing new

configurations and erasing configurations.
3.8.3.1 - PRESET / Recall screen

In the PRESET screen, select the Recall field and press the ENT key.
Preset / Recall :
A : SNG-LBR
B : SNG-HBR
C : LBR+DATA
1 : configuration name_1
8 : configuration name_8
• By clicking on the right arrow key, you can select the required configuration.
Eight user configurations are available, plus 3 factory-installed configurations
(A, B, C). All the characteristics of these configurations are described in the
following table:

Chapter 3 121
A B C
SERVICE Service ID 100 100 100
PMT PID 257 257 257
PCR PID 100 100 100
Type Digital TV Digital TV Digital TV
Service (1) Service (1) Service (1)
Name TV TV TV
Provider name None None None
Scrambling Clear mode Clear mode Clear mode
VIDEO Profile 4:2:0 MP@ML 4:2:2 P@ML 4:2:2 P@ML
PID 100 100 100
Bit Rate 7.6Mbit/s 20Mbit/s 9Mbit/s
Coding No low delay No low delay No low delay
Source SDI SDI SDI
Resolution 720x576 720x576 720x576
GOP 12 12 12
IP frame 3 3 3
Aspect ratio 4/3 4/3 4/3
AUDIO1&2 Input Analogue Analogue Analogue
PID audio 1 110 110 110
PID audio 2 111 111 111
Bit rate 256kbit/s 384kbit/s 384kbit/s
Mode Stereo Stereo Stereo
Coding MPEG1 Layer 2 MPEG1 Layer 2 MPEG1 Layer 2
DATA PID Not used Not used 103
Baud rate Not used Not used 9600
Stream type Not used Not used 0x80
TRANSMISSION Symbol rate 6.111Ms/s 23.333Ms/s 6.666Ms/s
Modulation QPSK QPSK QPSK
Code rate 3/4 7/8 7/8
Roll Off Auto Auto Auto
Level -15dBm -15dBm -15dBm
Output Off Air Off Air Off Air
Spectral inversion Off Off Off
Packet size 204 204 204
IF frequency 70MHz 70MHz 70MHz
L-Band 1140.0MHz 1140.0MHz 1140.0MHz

122 Chapter 3
All other parameters are not saved or recalled.
Note: If the N41S422P option is not implemented, the predefined configuration

"SNG-HBR" is not available. This is also the case with option N41SD56K - RS232 -
regarding the LBR+DATA configuration.
• Select the required configuration and press the ENT key.
3.8.3.2 - PRESET / Store screen

In the PRESET screen, select the Store field and press the ENT key.
Preset / Store :
1 : configuration name
Press the ENT key. The following screen appears to enter the configuration name.
Preset / Store/1 :
NEW : XXXXXXX SAVE

info:
The name of a new configuration is composed of 16 digits.

The operator modifies digits one by one by pressing ENT to increment the value
then moving the cursor with the right arrow key to go to the next character. Then
place the cursor on the SAVE command and press the ENT key.
Up to 8 user configurations can be stored.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX is an alphanumeric character string. The characters
allowed are: A...Z and 0, 1...9 plus some other characters (-, :, blank).

Chapter 3 123
3.8.3.3 - PRESET / Erase screen

In the PRESET screen, select the Erase field and press the ENT key.
Preset / Erase:
• Press ENT on the selected configuration to be removed, confirmation will be

requested.
ARE YOU SURE?
• Press ENT, configuration is acknowledged, then back to Preset menu.

• Press ESC, configuration is cancelled, then back to Preset menu.
Note: It is not possible to erase preset configurations A, B and C. They are not displayed
on this screen.

124 Chapter 3
3.8.4 - MOD.SETUP screen
In the main menu, select the Mod.Setup field and press the ENT key. The following
screen appears:
Root / Mod.Setup:
Tx O/P : IF
If : CARRIER OFF
L-Band : UNUSED
Convolution : QPSK 7/8

Symbol R : 06.666571 Ms/s
Info Bndwdth : 08.99987 MHz
Roll Off : AUTOMATIC
Spectrum : NON INVERTED
3.8.4.1 - MOD.SETUP / Tx O/P screen

In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Tx O/P field and press the ENT key.
Mod.Setup /Tx O/P: IF
Tx O/P: IF
The current value is given on the first line. The Tx O/P area allows the operator to
choose between the values IF and L-Band using the ⇒ and ⇐ keys, then by pressing
ENT the new value is taken into account and the first line is updated.

Chapter 3 125
3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen

In the Mod.Setup screen select the If field and press the ENT key.
Mod.Setup /If:
IF Freq : 00070.000 MHz
Low Level : -25.0
Nom Level : -10.0
Press ENT.
IF / IF Freq:
NEW : X X . X X X X X X Ms/s SAVE

info : 50-180 MHz
Press ENT to increment the value in the NEW field. The range is from 0-9. Press
SAVE once the value has been obtained. No confirmation is requested. If the value
requested falls outside the range specified on the fourth line info, the message
"incorrect value" is displayed and no change is made.
To change the Low Level or Nom Level parameter press ENT on the required
option. The current level will be displayed on the first line and can be changed in
0.5 steps on line 3 using the ⇒ (higher) and ⇐ (lower) keys. The lowest possible
value for both Low Level and Nom Level is -25.0 (max. 05.0 dBm). A beep sounds
when an unauthorised value is requested. The two screens are as follows:
IF Low/Level: -25.0
Level: -25.0

126 Chapter 3
IF Nominal/Level: -10.0
Level: -10.0
3.8.4.3 - MOD.SETUP / L-Band screen

In the Mod.Setup screen, select the L-Band field and press the ENT key.
Mod.Setup /L-Band:
L-Band Freq : 1140.000 MHz
Low Level : -25.0
Nom Level : -10.0
Osc. band : none / c / ku

Osc. value : non / c / ku
F can be set in 1 kHz steps.

The level range is: -20 dBm - +5.0 dBm.
Press ENT.
L-Band / L-Band Freq:

info : 950-1750 MHz

Chapter 3 127
For details on Low Level and Nom Level value editing, saving and ranges refer to
section 3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen.
3.8.4.4 - MOD.SETUP / Convolution screen

In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Convolution field and press the ENT key.
Mod.Setup / Convolution : QPSK 3/4
Convolution : QPSK 3/4
The current value is given on the first line.

The operator can choose between the different values in the following list,
depending on modulator capabilities:
QPSK 1/2, QPSK 2/3, QPSK 3/4, QPSK 5/6, QPSK 7/8, 8PSK 2/3, 8PSK 5/6,
8PSK 8/9, 16QAM3/4, 16QAM7/8, in compliance with EN 300421 standard "Digital
Video Broadcasting (DVB); Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for
11/12GHz satellite services".
The operator can tune the Convolution parameter by pressing the ⇒ and ⇐ keys.
When the value is chosen, press ENT, the first line is updated.
3.8.4.5 - MOD.SETUP / Symbol_R screen

In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Symbol_R field and press the ENT key.
Mod.Setup / Symbol Rate :

info : Max=16.000 Ms/s
• The digit to be modified is highlighted. The sign can be moved with the left
and right arrow key.

128 Chapter 3
• To increment the digit value, press the ENT key until the required value has
been reached. Constant pressing may speed up the process up to 3 characters
per second.
• To save the new value, move the cursor to SAVE and press ENT. The current
value is automatically updated.
• Should the operator press the ESC key after editing (even without pressing
SAVE), a warning window is displayed.
EXIT WITHOUT SAVING
Case of choosing YES: no change occurs, the Mod.Setup is displayed.

Case of choosing NO: The symbol-rate editing screen is displayed.
Note: The Info/Bandwidth field is updated accordingly - as well as the encoder output
bitrate audio and video rate on relevant control menus.
3.8.4.6 - MOD.SETUP / Info/Bandwidth screen

In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Info/Bndwdth screen and press the ENT key. A
beep is emitted and the screen remains unchanged:
Root/Mod. Setup :
Symbol R : 06.666571 Ms/s
Info Bndwdth : 08.99987 MHz
Roll Off : AUTOMATIC
This screen is displayed for information. No editing is allowed. The bandwidth

value is computed according to the Symbol_rate value and the relevant Roll_off
factor.

Chapter 3 129
3.8.4.7 - MOD.SETUP / Roll_off screen

In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Roll_off field and press the ENT key.
Mod.Setup / Roll Off : AUTOMATIC
Roll Off: AUTOMATIC
The Roll_off can be selected by pressing the ⇒ and ⇐ keys. The possible values are
26, 35 or AUTOMATIC. Press the ENT key to validate.
Notes:
The Info/Bandwidth value is internally computed according to the Symbol_rate and the
Roll_off values.
Roll-off values are in accordance with EN301210 standard "Digital Video Broadcast
(DVB); Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for Digital Satellite
News Gathering (DSNG) and other contribution applications by satellite"
QPSK + 35%,
8PSK + AUTO or 26% (default) or 35%,
16QAM + 26%.

130 Chapter 3
3.8.4.8 - MOD.SETUP / Spectrum screen

In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Spectrum field and press the ENT key.
Mod.Setup / Spectrum : NON INVERTED
Spectrum: NON INVERTED
The possible values are INVERTED or NON INVERTED.
3.8.5 - ENC.O/P screen
In the main menu, select the Enc.Output field and press the ENT key.
Root / Enc.Output :
NEW : X X . X X X X X X Mb/s SAVE

info : Max=28.000 Mb/s
This screen may be used for setting the output encoder frequency/TS rate. If a value
above the max specified value is entered, the "incorrect value" message is
displayed.
If the hardware modulator option is set, this screen is available for information only.

Chapter 3 131
3.8.6 - ENCODING screen
In the main screen, select the Encoding field and press the ENT key.
Root / Encoding :
VID_1 AUD_1 AUD_2 SER_1
The data and AMuSE items are displayed if related options are available in the
device.
• Select the required component and press the ENT key.
• Or press ESC if no change and exit to previous menu level.
3.8.6.1 - ENCODING / Video screen

In the Encoding screen, select the Video field and press the ENT key.
Encoding / Video
Status : Enable
Source: Digital serial 50Hz
Profile: 420 MP@ML
Rate / Auto: Yes

Vid_Rate: 07.00000 Mb/s
Latency: NORMAL - GOP 12/3
Resolution: 720X576
PID: 0100
• Select the required parameter and press the ENT key.

132 Chapter 3
Parameters Available choices

Status Enable or disable
Source Digital serial 50Hz, Digital serial 60Hz, Pattern 50Hz,
Pattern 60Hz, Composite PAL BDGHI, Composite
SECAM, Composite NTSC-M 60Hz
Profile 420MP@ML or 422P@ML (option)
Rate / Auto Yes or No
Vid_rate from 0.5 to 15Mb/s in MP@ML
from 0.5 to 50Mb/s in 422P@ML
Latency Normal - GOP 12/3, Normal - GOP 15/3, Low - GOP
12/1, Low - GOP 8/1, Ultra low (I frame, only)
Resolution 720x576, 704x576, 544x576, 480x576, 352x576,
352x288
PID Within the range 32 - 8190
Note: For the Rate/Auto parameter, the default value is "YES". It should be set to "NO" if
using the ASI TS input option (N41STSIN) or RS232 option (N41SD56K).
• Select ENT to validate your choice or select ESC to cancel changes.

Chapter 3 133
3.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen

In the ENCODING screen, select the Audio field (e.g. AUD_1 or AUD_2) then
press the ENT key.
Encoding / Audio1/2:
Status : Enable
Source : Analog
Mode / Rate : Stereo 256kbits
Headroom : 20 dB
Alignment : 4 dBu
Pid : 0110

Source Analog, Tone, Unbalanced,
Balanced, SDI
Mode / Rate Mono 64, 96, 128 Kbits
Dual 128, 192, 256, 384 Kbits
Stereo 128, 192, 256, 384 Kbits
Joint 128, 192, 256, 384 Kbits
Headroom 8 - 20 dB, in 1dB steps
Alignment 0 - 4 dBu, in 1dBu steps
PID Within the range 32 - 8190

134 Chapter 3
Note:
• Mode / Rate modification automatically causes Video_rate adjustment.
• The Headroom and Alignment parameters can be changed if the analog audio is
selected.
3.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen

In the ENCODING screen, select the Data field (e.g. SER_1) and press the ENT
key.
Encoding / Data /
Status : Enable
Transfer : 9600
PID : 0103
There is only one screen for the data parameters.

This screen is proposed if the Data injection option (N41SD56K) is enabled.

Transfer 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 bauds
PID Within the range 0 - 8190, excluding PCR, video,
audio PIDs used in the locally generated service.

Chapter 3 135
3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen
In the main menu, select the Scrambling field and press the ENT key.
Root / Scrambling :
BISS MODE_1
This mode is in compliance with the BISS standard set out in the reference document
EBU / Tech.3290 "Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS)". Press ENT.
Scrambling / Mode 1 :
Status : Disable
Session word: 15.34.56.23.45.67
If no Mode_1 is active, the current mode value is NONE.

To modify the Session word, the Status must be set to "enable" and the DVB
Scrambling/BISS option must be declared.

136 Chapter 3
3.8.8 - ALARM screen
In the main menu, select the ALARM screen and press the ENT key.
ALARM / 5 Alarms :
17 / 519
[SSEB / AUD2] : right signal under -65dBFS
34 / 0
A distinction is made between prompt and deferred alarms. You can move up and
down the alarm list with the left and right arrow keys.
- first line: number of alarms
- second line: only one alarm is described in the screen. This line gives the
number of one alarm.
- third line: the cause of the alarm.
- fourth line: the following alarm.
Note: Should an alarm occur, "ALARM" flashes in the default window.

Chapter 3 137
3.8.9 - OTHER screen
In the main menu, select the Other field and press the ENT key.
Root / Other :
Setup Monitor Tools
3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen

In the Other screen, select the Setup field and press the ENT key.
Other / Setup :
Asi I/P S Id Framing Station Name

Msdl

ASI Input Disable or enable
S-Id Service name and PID (5 digits)
Framing 188 or 204
Station name 8 digits
Msdl disabled (beep)
ASI input: If this parameter is enabled, it is no longer possible to auto-adjust the

video rate on the remultiplexing unit.

138 Chapter 3
Station name: The parameter is sent in the TSDT table. The name is also displayed
on the front panel at upper menu level. It is mapped into the service name.
Framing: When changing MPEG framing, the Symbol_rate is not affected, but the
relevant output clock rate is computed.
3.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen

In the Other screen, select the Monitor field and press the ENT key.
This consultation menu indicates the bitrate, the source and the mode for each
output video and audio component.
CONTEXT:
Output Input
(ENT) : Output signal
3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen
• Select the Output field, then press ENT to obtain the services of the TS output.
CONTEXT:/Output /
Output flow : 4136 kb/s
TV: 100
Service flow : 4639kb/s
• Press ENT to get the components of the selected service.

Chapter 3 139
CONTEXT:/Output / TV : 100
Service flow (TV : 100) : 4639kb/s
AUD:110 AUD :111 VID:100 SER:768
Component flow : 4107kb/s
3.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen
The service is visible when ASI I/P is "enabled". In addition PID conflict
management is supported.
• Go back to the MONITOR screen, then select the Input field.
CONTEXT:/Input /
IN1
(ENT) : Input services
• Press ENT to get the services of the selected TS input.
CONTEXT:/Input / IN1
COD3: TV41 COD3: TV42

Service flow : 406 kb/s
• Press ENT to get the components of the selected service.

140 Chapter 3
CONTEXT: /. . . /Input / IN1 / COD3 TV41

Service flow (TV : 100) : 583 kb/s
VID:1000 AUD :1001 AUD : 1002
Component flow : 204 kb/s

Chapter 3 141
3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen

In the Other screen, select the Tools field and press the ENT key.
Other / Tools :
Control Ip Address Reboot Option

About Time
3.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen
The Control menu is already described in section 3.4 - Ergonomy.
3.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen
The IP address defines the device address for the control&command network. This
TCP/IP protocol network is connected via the Ethernet connector on the device rear
panel. In Local mode, it is possible to change the IP Address, IP Netmask and IP
Gateway via the encoder front panel.
In the Tools screen, select the field to be changed and press ENT.
Example: changing the IP address:
Tools / IP Address:
IP Address IP Netmask IP Gateway
Once you have selected IP Address:

142 Chapter 3
IP Address / IP Address :
NEW : 172.016.010.185 SAVE

info : IP Address
Each digit is changed individually. After rebooting, the device takes this new
address into account.
The IP address and IP netmask or default gateway parameters can also be changed
using the {Telnet} application. See section Commands available with the Telnet
application page 390
Figure 3: Modification of Addresses

Chapter 3 143
3.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen
In the Tools screen, select the Reboot field and press the ENT key.
Tools / Reboot : No Autotest
Reboot : No Autotest
When rebooting the device, 3 options are available: No Autotest, Short Autotest or
Long Autotest.
Note: After rebooting the device, it automatically recovers the previous active
configuration and remains in the previous control mode (local or remote).
3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen
In the Tools screen, select the Option field and press the ENT key.
Tools / Option :
Software Hardware
" In the Option screen, select the Software field and press the ENT key.
Option / Software :
00 Low Dl : Enable
01 VBI Pr : Enable
02 Ext. Mod : Disable

144 Chapter 3
The available options are given in the table below:
Option number Option name

00 Low delay
01 VBI processing
02 External modulator
03 Data injection RS232
04 TS input
05 DVB scrambling / BISS
06 422P@ML
For example for the first option "Low delay", in the NEW area the operator must
enter the specific key for this option.
Note: The specific key is supplied by NEXTREAM
Option / 04 - TS Inp:
NEW : 00.00 SAVE

info : TS input processing
Caution: When an option is already declared, the previous screen is displayed with the
value 00.00. If the operator validates the SAVE command, the option is disabled.
• Enter the specific key,

• Place the cursor on the SAVE field. Press ENT. The following screen is
displayed.

Chapter 3 145
will be active only after next reboot
" In the Option screen, select the Hardware field and press the ENT key.
Option / Hardware :
Slot 1 : DPSN
Slot 2 : ISMB
Slot 3 : ALARM RELAY
All the hardware options available with their slot allocation are given in the table
below:
Slot allocation Available choices

0 SSEB
1 DPSN, COMPIN, AMuSE AC3 MPEG, NONE
2 ISMB, AMuSE AC3 MPEG, NONE
3 Alarm Relay Closure, NONE
4 ATADI, NONE
• Place the cursor on the required slot and press ENT.
Option / SLOT 2 : ISMB
SLOT 2: ISMB

146 Chapter 3
The operator can press the right arrow key in the SLOT 2 area between the selection
cursors to choose between ISMB, AMuSE AC3 MPEG and NONE. When the choice is
made, press ENT and the following screen appears:
will be active only after next reboot
3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen
In the Tools screen, select the About field and press the ENT key.
CONTEXT : /
Autotest Information Connections

(ENT) : Autotest report
" In the About screen, select the Autotest field and press the ENT key. The
following screen appears for 2 seconds:
CONTEXT : / Autotest
Autotest OK

Chapter 3 147
" In the About screen, select the Information field and press the ENT key. This
menu comprises 4 screens:
First screen: Software version and IP address
CONTEXT : / Information
Type : SSE IP Address : 172.16.10.175
TES: 99.41 SSB: 2.0.6.4 ISP :9 Hdw: 4 50Hz
Scrambler : ALL PRESS ENT
Second screen: Licensed software options
-- OPTIONS LIST --
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
N41SLODE : Low delay
Third screen: Licensed hardware options
Slot 1 : DPSN Slot 2 : ISMB MODUL

Firmware 2.30
Fourth screen: Equipment code used to obtain new software options
Equipment code : 0XCE1C
Serial number : 16831237AA/01004
AUD10:600 AUD11:600 AUD20:600 AUD21:600

148 Chapter 3
Note: The equipment code is required for licence code generation to enable software
options.
" In the About screen, select the Connections field and press the ENT key.
CONTEXT : / Connections
-- CONNECTIONS LIST --
PC : INFO PC : EVT PC : INFO
[PC name]
3.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen
In the Tools screen, select the Time field and press the ENT key.
CONTEXT : /
Time (Y/M/D H:M:S) : time
(ENT) : Time set
The Time field indicates the current date and time.

In LOCAL mode, the user can modify the date by pressing the ENT key. The third
and fourth lines are modified and the following screen appears:
CONTEXT : /
Time (Y/M/D H:M:S) : time
+ YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Rec
(ENT) : change increment mode

Chapter 3 149
Field definitions and adjustment ranges

• The first field can take the values "+" (increase) or "-" (decrease).
• The YYYY (year) field ranges between 1900 and 2107.
• The MM (month) field ranges between 1 and 12.
• The DD (day) field ranges between 1 and 31.
• The HH (hour) field ranges between 0 and 23.
• The MM (minutes) field ranges between 0 and 59.
• The SS (seconds) field ranges between 0 and 59.
• The Rec (update) field records the current timer values.
Operating mode
• To increase (or decrease) a field value, firstly check that there is a + sign (or - sign)
in the first field (if not, select the first field and press ENT). Then, select the field to
be adjusted. Finally, press ENT as many times as necessary to get the required
value.
• Once the new time has been programmed, select the Rec field and press ENT to
confirm. If the time can be set (LOCAL mode), the previous menu then reappears.
In REMOTE mode, the system emits a beep.
Note: The time to be entered is the local time. The offset between local and UTC time may
be set by a remote PC station. This time can be updated either by the front panel or by the
receiving of a broadcast message from GALET software (UTC Time Broadcaster) or by
TDT. The default value is set to +2h00 (i.e. local time = UTC time + 2h00).

150 Chapter 3
BLANK PAGE

Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software 151
Chapter 4
PC operation - Control & Command software
4.1 - Ergonomic aspects ............................................................................ 155

4.1.1 - Screen .......................................................................................... 155
4.1.2 - Mouse ........................................................................................... 159
4.1.3 - Setting the interface language ...................................................... 160
4.1.4 - On-line manuals............................................................................ 162
4.1.5 - Simulator mode............................................................................. 163
4.1.5.1 - Activation of simulator mode ........................................................ 163
4.1.5.2 - Simulation of options.................................................................... 164
4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking .............................................................. 165
4.2 - Running software ............................................................................... 168
4.3 - {Equipment Interface} application .................................................... 170
4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application ................................................ 173

4.4.1 - Purpose and scope of the application........................................... 173
4.4.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 174
4.4.3 - Declaring the device ..................................................................... 175
4.4.4 - Cancelling/validating device installation changes......................... 179
4.4.4.1 - Cancelling changes to device installation .................................... 179
4.4.4.2 - Validating changes to device installation ..................................... 180
4.4.5 - Additional device installation commands ...................................... 181
4.4.5.1 - Remove a device ......................................................................... 181
4.4.5.2 - Change device name and address .............................................. 181
4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application ............................................. 184

4.5.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 186
4.5.3 - Device parameters........................................................................ 189
4.5.3.1 - Encoder operating parameters (advanced parameters) .............. 189
4.5.3.1.1 - “General” item ............................................................................. 192
4.5.3.1.2 - “Output” item ............................................................................... 194
4.5.3.1.3 - “Encoders” item........................................................................... 196
4.5.3.1.4 - “Data injection” item .................................................................... 199

152 Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software
4.5.3.1.5 - “Scrambler” item.......................................................................... 200

4.5.3.1.6 - “SAM card” item .......................................................................... 201
4.5.3.1.7 - “Access control” item................................................................... 202
4.5.3.1.8 - “SIMS” item ................................................................................. 203
4.5.3.1.9 - “Time” item .................................................................................. 204
4.5.3.1.10 - “TBS Signalling” item................................................................. 206
4.5.3.1.11 - “ISO Signalling” item ................................................................. 208
4.5.3.1.12 - “DVB Signalling” item ................................................................ 209
4.5.3.1.13 - “PSIP Signalling” item ............................................................... 211
4.5.3.2 - Modulator parameters .................................................................. 212
4.5.3.3 - NIT table ....................................................................................... 215
4.5.3.3.1 - Edit the NIT ................................................................................. 215
4.5.3.3.2 - Changing descriptors .................................................................. 219
4.5.3.3.3 - Deleting descriptors..................................................................... 219
4.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT.................................................................. 220
4.5.3.4 - TOT table...................................................................................... 223
4.5.3.4.1 - Edit the TOT ................................................................................ 223
4.5.3.4.2 - Changing descriptors .................................................................. 227
4.5.3.4.3 - Deleting descriptors..................................................................... 227
4.5.3.5 - Saving/Loading a device configuration......................................... 228
4.5.3.6 - Archived configurations ................................................................ 230
4.5.3.7 - Cancelling/Validating changes ..................................................... 235
4.5.3.8 - Device locking / unlocking ............................................................ 237
4.5.4 - Generated Services...................................................................... 238
4.5.4.1 - TV service..................................................................................... 239
4.5.4.1.1 - Editing parameters of the video component................................ 243
4.5.4.1.2 - Editing parameters of the audio component................................ 255
4.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component................................... 264
4.5.4.1.4 - Editing parameters of the data component ................................. 271
4.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors .......................................................................... 283
4.5.4.1.6 - SDT descriptors........................................................................... 289
4.5.4.2 - Advanced Functions ..................................................................... 290
4.5.4.2.1 - Shared components .................................................................... 290
4.5.4.2.2 - Ghost components ...................................................................... 291
4.5.4.2.3 - Inband command......................................................................... 293
4.5.5 - TS input ........................................................................................ 293
4.5.5.1 - First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input ........................ 298
selecting services and EMM flows ...................................................... 298
4.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributary................................. 298
4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services ................................................................... 303
4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows ............................................................... 306
4.5.5.3 - Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services ...................... 309
4.5.5.3.1 - General filtering conditions.......................................................... 309
4.5.5.3.2 - Individual filtering of components ................................................ 312
4.5.5.3.3 - Attaching components................................................................. 316

Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software 153
4.5.5.3.4 - Removing a service .................................................................... 321

4.5.5.4 - Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components ............. 322
4.5.5.4.1 - General filtering conditions ......................................................... 322
4.5.5.4.2 - Removing a component .............................................................. 324
4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application......................................... 326

4.6.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 327
4.6.3 - Alarm supervision ......................................................................... 334
4.6.3.1 - Alarms window ............................................................................. 334
4.6.3.2 - Equipment window ....................................................................... 338
4.6.4 - Supervision of services and data flow .......................................... 340
4.6.5 - Save all/Load all commands......................................................... 343
4.6.6 - Maintenance commands............................................................... 344
4.6.7 - Audible warning of alarms ............................................................ 350
4.7 - {Download} application .................................................................... 351

4.7.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 351
4.7.3 - Procedure ..................................................................................... 353
4.7.3.1 - Before downloading ..................................................................... 353
4.7.3.2 - Downloading ................................................................................ 358
4.7.3.3 - After downloading ........................................................................ 359
4.7.4 - Additional commands ................................................................... 360
4.8 - {Event Log} application .................................................................... 362

4.8.1 - Principles of the {Event Log} application ...................................... 362
4.8.1.1 - Event ............................................................................................ 362
4.8.1.2 - View configuration functions ........................................................ 363
4.8.1.3 - Event exporting ............................................................................ 363
4.8.1.4 - Miscellaneous .............................................................................. 364
4.8.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 364
4.8.3 - Commands ................................................................................... 368
4.8.3.1 - Commands for opening an event log file ..................................... 368
4.8.3.2 - Command for exporting in text format.......................................... 369
4.8.3.3 - Display commands....................................................................... 371
4.8.3.4 - Calculation commands................................................................. 376
4.9 - {Alarm Help} application.................................................................... 379

4.9.1 - Scope............................................................................................ 379
4.9.2 - Features........................................................................................ 379
4.9.2.1 - Extended description of alarms.................................................... 379

154 Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software
4.9.2.2 - Print capability .............................................................................. 380

4.9.2.3 - Search engine .............................................................................. 380
4.9.2.4 - Navigation tool.............................................................................. 380
and {Event Log} applications................................................................ 380
4.9.2.6 - Synchronisation with other applications ....................................... 380
4.9.2.7 - User defined comments................................................................ 380
4.9.2.8 - French/English versions ............................................................... 381
4.9.2.9 - Customisation of display............................................................... 381
4.9.2.10 - Summary of alarms .................................................................... 381
4.9.2.11 - Help / About................................................................................ 381
4.9.3 - Access to the {Alarm help} application ......................................... 382
4.9.3.1 - Access via the {Monitoring &Redundancy} application ................ 382
4.9.3.2 - Access via the {Event Log} application......................................... 382
4.9.3.3 - Access via any application ........................................................... 383
4.9.4 - User Interface (main window and commands) ............................. 384
4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application ......................... 390

4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application ....................................................... 390
4.10.2 - IP Settings .................................................................................. 396
4.10.3 - Parameter definitions ................................................................. 397
4.10.3.1 - Video bidir................................................................................... 397
4.10.3.2 - Audio stream type....................................................................... 397
4.10.3.3 - LTW_offset ................................................................................. 398
4.10.3.4 - SPE (SuperEncoder) switch source mode ................................. 398
4.10.3.5 - VBI stream type .......................................................................... 398
4.10.3.6 - LDSChurch mode ....................................................................... 398
4.10.3.7 - ABSAT mode.............................................................................. 399
4.10.3.8 - Multichoice-D1 mode.................................................................. 399
4.10.3.9 - Foxtel 6dB uplift.......................................................................... 400
4.10.3.10 - Closed Caption type ................................................................. 401
4.10.3.11 - Extended-data insertion (line 284)............................................ 401

Chapter 4 155
4.1 - Ergonomic aspects
Foreword
Some commands cannot be directly accessed using the DBS 2930 operating software,
however some of them are described in this chapter. These are notably the commands
that can be accessed using the {Telnet} application as described in the section
Commands available with the Telnet application page 390.
4.1 - ERGONOMIC ASPECTS
4.1.1 - Screen
The screen displays:

• a title,
• a menu bar,
• a tool bar,
• a main window,
• a status bar.
When you declare the services and components, you will display the following
screen:

156 Chapter 4
menu bar tool bar main window
status bar
Figure 4.1: Example of screen
• Title
The title displays the application name.
• Menu bar
The menu bar provides access to various functions that can be selected via pull-
down menus activated with a left mouse click:
• quit the session (Quit menu);
• confirm, cancel or test changes (Edit menu);
• lock/unlock and save functions (Tool menu);
• display the software release or access the on-line User Manual (Help
menu).

Chapter 4 157
• Tool bar
The first three buttons provide quick access to the most frequently used functions in
the menu bar:
• quit the application ( button equivalent to the Quit control of the menu
bar),
• cancel a change ( button equivalent to the Edit/Cancel control of the
menu bar),
• confirm a change ( button equivalent to the Edit/Validate control of the
menu bar).
The fourth and fifth buttons ( and ) are used to lock or unlock the operating
station.

158 Chapter 4
• Main window
Information appearing in this area is specific to each application as regards content
and formatting (tree structure, icon representation, divisions of the main window).
A tree structure display function (+/- sign) is available in all applications.
+: lower level tree structure not displayed.
-: lower level tree structure displayed.
without sign: indicates no lower level exists.
To display or remove display of the lower level tree structure, double-click on the
line featuring the "+" or "-" sign or click once on the "+" or "-" sign.
Figure 4.2: Example of main window with lower level displayed
Figure 4.3: Example of main window with lower level not displayed

Chapter 4 159
When the configuration is active, the status bar displays Active configuration.
Otherwise, the Edited configuration message replaces Active configuration. A
pencil indicates the inconsistency between the information displayed and the real
configuration. The icon will appear each time the operator edits a configuration.
The pencil disappears when the operator validates the configuration (click on the
button, the Edit/Validate... command in the menu bar or the Validate
modifications... command in the shortcut menu related to the device in some
applications) or cancels the changes (click on the button, the Edit/Cancel...
command in the menu bar or the Cancel modifications... command in the shortcut
menu related to the device in some applications).
• Status bar
The status bar provides context-sensitive help, which is general information the
user may require at any time. It is situated at the bottom of the main window.
4.1.2 - Mouse
The left mouse button is used to select an object.

The right mouse button displays a shortcut menu showing all the possible actions
for this object.
Left mouse button

(selecting an object)
Right mouse button

(displaying shortcut
menu)
Figure 4.4: Using the mouse (e.g. for encoder configuration)

160 Chapter 4
4.1.3 - Setting the interface language
In all applications except the {Equipment Interface} application, the language

used for the interface can be selected in the Windows Control Panel (Regional
Settings application). Screens are available in French (for French-speaking
countries) or English.
, Procedure
1. In the Start menu, select Settings, then Control Panel.
2. Click on the Regional Settings icon.
3. In the first tab in this window, choose the interface language: French (Standard)
or English (United Kingdom).
Notes:
- The language of the {Alarm Help} application cannot be set. It corresponds to the
language chosen in the Windows Control Panel (Regional Settings application) during
installation of the DBS 2930 “STAND ALONE” software.
- The chosen language is only acknowledged on application startup. When changing
languages, rerun any open applications.

Chapter 4 161
Figure 4.5: Regional Settings (Windows NT) or Regional Options (Windows 2000)

162 Chapter 4
4.1.4 - On-line manuals
A command is available on the menu bar of the applications for rapid access to the
on-line versions of the user manuals installed on the PC.
This command, located in the Help menu (Help/Operating manual...), displays the
list of .pdf documents located in a default directory. The default directory can be
changed by clicking on Browse...
When you double-click on a document, ACROBAT READER is run as required,

loading the .pdf file corresponding to the selected manual.
If you do not have ACROBAT READER, you can install it from the Documenta-
tion CD via the Get Acrobat Reader button.

Chapter 4 163
4.1.5 - Simulator mode
This mode is used to simulate the device. When it is activated, the application does
not transmit anything to the device but simulates the same operation without error.
Therefore, no alarm is raised and all validations are acknowledged.
4.1.5.1 - Activation of simulator mode

, Procedure
From the {Equipment Installation} application:
1. Select the PC icon in the main window;
2. Select the Edit parameters... command;
Figure 4.6: Activation of Simulator mode
3. Click on the Simulator Enabled button;

4. Click on OK;
5. Rerun the {Equipment Interface} application for the parameter to be
acknowledged.

164 Chapter 4
4.1.5.2 - Simulation of options

The presence or absence of options for a device is managed by the {Equipment
Installation} application. Simulator mode must be activated beforehand (see
previous section).
, Procedure to simulate the presence of options
From the {Equipment Installation} application:
1. Select the device;
2. Select the Edit parameters... option in the shortcut menu (right mouse click);
3. Select the Simulator tab;
Figure 4.7: Presence of options to simulate
4. Click on the options to simulate;

5. Click on OK;
6. Rerun the {Equipment Interface} application for this parameter to be
acknowledged.
Note:
This information is saved in the servex.ini file located in the installation directory.

Chapter 4 165
4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking
The lock/unlock function guarantees coherent operation when several stations are
being used to operate the device.
It is not necessary to lock or even validate when installing or removing a device.
These specific operations are immediately acknowledged by the other applications.
Subsequent changes can also be made without locking the connection. These are
indicated by the ’pencil’ icon and the ’Edited configuration’ message in the status
bar as shown in the figure below:
Figure 4.8: Edited configuration
The changes in progress are not necessarily lost during connection locking. The
user can choose to save them. Click on , select the Lock device command in the
shortcut menu or Tool/Lock all... in the menu bar to display the following dialogue
box:
Figure 4.9: "Lock and lose changes?" confirmation request

166 Chapter 4
To show whether an application is locked or not, the background colour of the main
window is white when it is locked and grey otherwise.
Figure 4.10: View of the window when the application is locked
Figure 4.11: View of the window when the application is unlocked

Chapter 4 167
Note:
The following screen is displayed when the Ethernet link is not properly connected
(disconnected or the equipment is switched off).
Figure 4.12: Availability of the application

168 Chapter 4
4.2 - Running software
4.2 - RUNNING SOFTWARE
After starting the WINDOWS session on the operating station PC and opening the
directory which contains the “Stand-Alone” applications, the following display
appears:
Figure 4.13: Icon display
The icons represent the different "Stand-Alone" software applications.

The software must be run in the following order:
1. Start the operating session by activating the {Equipment Interface} application
by double-clicking on the icon.
Notes:
1. To shut down a session, close this application after first closing all other applications.
2. It is recommended to leave this application open as long as the device is being used,
even if no other application has been run.
2. Declare the device via the {Equipment Installation} application. This step is
unnecessary if the device has already been declared in a previous session.
3. Set the technical configuration for the device (operating parameters, signalling
table editing, service creation) from the {Technical Configuration} application.
4. Start the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application to monitor the device.
5. Start the {Download} application to download embedded software.
6. Start the {Event Log} application to view events occurring on the encoder
(alarms, reboot, etc.).
7. Start the {Alarm Help} application to understand the meaning of alarms
occurring on the encoder.

Chapter 4 169
4.2 - Running software
Notes:
1. The {Download Embedded Software} application is used by NEXTREAM for
downloading embedded software.
2. The {ATM Connect Management} application does not concern the DBE 4110
Encoder.

170 Chapter 4
4.3 - {Equipment Interface} application
4.3 - {EQUIPMENT INTERFACE} APPLICATION
Foreword:
The {Equipment Interface} application handles communication with the device
operated from the PC and operations carried out as background tasks (e.g. alarm
collection).
It is recommended to activate the {Equipment Interface} application (servex.exe)
before using any other operating software applications and to remain active as long
as the device is operated even if no application is active. Otherwise, an error
message appears:
Figure 4.14: Error message when the connection with {Interface Equipements}
is not established
If the {Equipment Interface} application is activated after another one, the

connection with the application is automatically open.
This application do not propose any operation command.
It is recommended to close all the applications before leaving the {Equipment
Interface} application. Otherwise the following dialogue box appears:
Figure 4.15: Confirmation before leaving the {Interface Equipements} application

Chapter 4 171
Screen layout
menu bar tool bar secondary window main window
Figure 4.16: Screen

172 Chapter 4
• Menu bar
Menu Command Comment

File Exit Quit the application.
Help About... Details of software version.
• Tool bar
Button Comment
Shows application activity.
• Main window
Reserved.
• Secondary window
This window gives the list of open applications.

Chapter 4 173
4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application
4.4 - {EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION} APPLICATION
Foreword:
• It is recommended to activate the {Equipment Interface} application
(servex.exe) before starting the {Equipment Installation} application, see
note in section 4.3 - page 170 and to remain the {Equipment Interface}
application active as long as the device is operated, even if no application is
active.
• It is not necessary to lock the application (or validate) to de-install or install a
device.
• The language used for the interface can be selected. Screens are available in
French or English (see section 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language page 160).
4.4.1 - Purpose and scope of the application
The main function of the {Equipment Installation} application is declaring the

device. This condition is essential for the device to be configured and supervised
from other software applications.
The following sections present the screen layout and the different functions offered
by the application.
section 4.4.2 Screen layout

section 4.4.3 Declaring the device
section 4.4.4 Cancelling/validating device installation changes
section 4.4.5 Additional device installation commands:
. Remove a device,
. Change device name and address.

174 Chapter 4
4.4.2 - Screen layout
Figure 4.17: Screen
• Menu bar

Quit Quit the application.
Edit Cancel... Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e.
the active configuration).
Validate... Confirm changes. The edited configuration is saved, it
becomes the active configuration.
Tool Lock all... Lock all device connections (this command has the same effect
as the shortcut Lock device command in Stand-Alone opera-
tion), see section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking page 165
for details.
Unlock all... Unlock all device connections (this command has the same
effect as the shortcut Unlock device command in Stand-Alone
operation), see section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking page
165 for details.
Help About... Details about software version.
Operating Open on-line user manuals.
manual... see section 4.1.4 - On-line manuals page 162 for details.

Chapter 4 175
• Tool bar
Button Comment
Quit the application.
Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e. the active con-
figuration).
Confirm changes. The configuration is saved.
Lock the terminal for the current application. The main window background
is white.
Unlock the terminal for the current application. The main window back-
ground is grey.
• Main window
When the application is started up, a list of devices is displayed. This list takes the
form of a two-level tree structure and each line is preceded by an icon which
facilitates identification of the different device types:
• level 1, at the top of the list, features the PC element which is unique and
represents the operating PC,
• level 2 features the encoder directly operated by the PC through the Ethernet
link.
4.4.3 - Declaring the device
When the application is activated, the main window contains just the icon of the PC
if it is the first time it is being used, or the tree structure of the last saved
configuration. If the previous representation is not suitable, it should be deleted (see
section 4.4.5.1 - Remove a device page 181) or modified (see section 4.4.5.2 -
Change device name and address page 181).
Note: The IP address of the device must be entered beforehand using the appropriate
command on the front panel (menu: Other/Tools/IP Address).

176 Chapter 4
Figure 4.18: Main window in the absence of a previous declaration
, Procedure for declaring the device

1. Select the icon representing the PC.
2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing PC-specific
commands.
Add a device...
Edit parameters...
3. Choose the Add a device... command.

A first dialogue box then opens.

Chapter 4 177
Figure 4.19: Device parameter fields (type)
4. Select the Digital Broadcast Encoder type and the device model DBE 4110
(DSNG).
5. Click on Next >.
A second dialogue box is displayed.
Figure 4.20: Device parameter fields (address)

178 Chapter 4
6. Enter the device’s name and IP address. The device name will be used by the
other applications.
7. Click on Finish.
The declared device appears in the tree structure with the following information:
name, IP address.
Figure 4.21: Main window after declaring the device
Note:
The Stand-Alone Control & Command software supplied with the DBE 4110 only allows
installation of one DBE 4110.

Chapter 4 179
4.4.4 - Cancelling/validating device installation changes
4.4.4.1 - Cancelling changes to device installation

, Procedure
1. Select the pull-down Edit menu in the menu bar.
Figure 4.22: Command for cancelling changes
2. Choose the Cancel... command.

A dialogue box is then available to confirm that you wish to cancel the changes.
Figure 4.23: Confirmation request
3. Click on OK.
After confirmation, the command is executed and the display reflects the device’s
active configuration.
Note: The button achieves the same effect.

180 Chapter 4
4.4.4.2 - Validating changes to device installation

Configuration changes are only effective when validated.
, Procedure
1. Select the pull-down Edit menu in the menu bar.
Figure 4.24: Command for validating changes
2. Choose the Validate... command.

A dialogue box is then available to confirm changes.
3. Click on OK.
After confirmation, the command is executed and the display reflects the device’s
active configuration.
The lower right-hand edge of the main window now displays the words "Active
configuration" and the ’pencil’ icon next to the device has disappeared.
Note: The button achieves the same effect.

Chapter 4 181
4.4.5 - Additional device installation commands
4.4.5.1 - Remove a device

The command for removing the device is used to cancel declaration of that device.
, Procedure
1. Select the device in the tree structure.
2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific
commands.
Edit parameters...
Remove
Lock device
Unlock device
3. Choose the Remove command.
4.4.5.2 - Change device name and address

This command uses the dialogue box used for device declaration.
, Procedure
1. Select the device in the tree structure.
commands.
Edit parameters...
Remove
Lock device
Unlock device
3. Choose the Edit parameters... command.

182 Chapter 4
Figure 4.26: Edit device parameters dialogue box (1/2)
Note:
The IP address cannot be modified from this dialogue box. To change the IP address it is
necessary to de-install, then re-install the device (see section 4.4.3 - Declaring the device
page 175) with the new address.

Chapter 4 183
The second screen indicates the type of encoder used.
Figure 4.27: Edit device parameters dialogue box (2/2)

184 Chapter 4
4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application
4.5 - {TECHNICAL CONFIGURATION} APPLICATION
Foreword:
• Before starting the {Technical Configuration} application, it is recommended
to activate the {Equipment Interface} application (servex.exe), see note in
section 4.3 - page 170. It is recommended to activate this application before
using any other operating software applications.
• To modify parameters in the application, do not forget to lock the terminal for
the current application ( ). The commands are then accessible. The main
window background is white.
French or English (see section 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language).
The main configuration functions of a DBE 4110 single-service encoder available

to the user are as follows:
• edit the parameters of the operated device: output frequency, TS packet size,
etc.;
• declare standard TV, radio, VBI services;
• edit video component, audio components, teletext component, private data
components;
• edit Network Information Table (NIT);
• edit Time Offset Table (TOT);
• edit descriptors in the PMT and SDT tables;
• edit filtering conditions on the TS Input for remultiplexing.

Chapter 4 185
IMPORTANT:
In the {Technical Configuration} application, TS bitrates are maximum estimated
values used to check that the output multiplex rate is high enough to transmit all the
components. Estimated TS bitrates may be slightly higher than the measured ones
displayed in the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application, e.g. an estimated
417kbit/s component will be measured at around 407kbit/s.
The following sections present the screen layout and the different functions
available with the application.

section 4.5.3 Device parameters
. Encoder operating parameters (advanced parameters),
. Modulator parameters,
. NIT table,
. TOT table,
. Saving/Loading a device configuration
. Archived configurations,
. Cancelling/Validating changes,
. Device locking / unlocking
section 4.5.4 Generated Services
. TV service,
. Editing parameters of the video component,
. Editing parameters of the audio component,
. Editing parameters of the VBI component,
. Editing parameters of the data component,
. PMT descriptors,
. SDT descriptors,
. Advanced Functions,
. Shared components,
. Ghost components,
. Inband command.
section 4.5.5 TS input
. First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input (level 2)
. Second level filtering: filtering conditions on the tributary, select-
ing services and EMM flows (level 3)
. Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services (level 4)
. Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components (level 5)

186 Chapter 4
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Figure 4.28: Screen
• Menu bar

Edit Cancel... Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e.
the active configuration).
Validate... Confirm changes. The edited configuration is saved; it
becomes the active configuration.
Tool Lock all... Lock the device (configuration commands are accessible). See
section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking for details.
Unlock all... Unlock the device (configuration commands are not accessi-
ble). See section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking for details.
Save all... Save your configurations to file (see following note).
Help About... Information about software version.
Operating Open on-line user manual.
manual... See section 4.1.4 - On-line manuals for details.

Chapter 4 187
Note concerning the "Save all" command:

This function is used to back up the active configuration of operated devices. The created
files can then be reloaded from the {Technical Configuration} application. When the
Save all... command is selected in the menu bar, the following dialogue box is displayed
for you to define the path to the folder where you want to save your configuration along
with any associated comment which will feature in the header of each file. The Browse...
button is available for you to select the file location. The program automatically creates a
folder, which takes the name of the device, in which configuration files will be saved. The
file name always consists of "technical" plus the user-defined suffix (e.g.
technical_001.mcf). There is no point in adding an extension as the .mcf extension is added
by default. When you have entered the fields, click on OK to confirm and then validate (
button or Edit/Validate... in the menu bar).
Root Path Root Path is the root directory. The Browse... button
is used for selecting another directory from the list of
available directories. If the directory entered does not
exist, the command fails.
Suffix Suffix is the text attached to the file name. Do not
add the ’_’ character as it will be added
automatically.
Comment Comment placed in each file. It is displayed on file
retrieval.

188 Chapter 4
• Tool bar
Button Comment
Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e. the active
configuration).
Confirm changes. The edited configuration is saved; it becomes the active
configuration.
Lock the terminal for the current application. The commands are accessible.
The main window background is white.
Unlock the terminal for the current application. The commands are not
accessible (only consultation is possible). The main window background is
grey.
• Main window
A three level tree view shows the encoder which was pre-installed via the
{Equipment Installation} application.
• level 1, at the top of the list, represents the encoder,
• level 2 represents
- a "Generated Services" item that groups together all the services generated
locally by the encoder. Under this item are represented:
. at level 3: the generated services with indication of their type (TV
service, radio service, etc.) and their names,
. at level 4: the components with indication of their type (video, audio,
VBI, data), their PIDs, their physical sources (board and connector) and
their programmed rates.
- the "Tributary" or TS item. Under this item are represented:
. at level 3: the input TS,
. at level 4: the filtered services of the input TS,
. at level 5: the filtered components of the filtered services from the
input TS and also the attached components (local data component atta-
ched to an incoming TS service).

Chapter 4 189
4.5.3 - Device parameters
4.5.3.1 - Encoder operating parameters (advanced parameters)

The application has an Edit advanced parameters... command for displaying and
editing the parameters related to general operation of the device.
, Procedure
1. Select the device;
commands;
Edit advanced parameters...

Edit modulator parameters...
NIT >
TOT >
Load device configuration...
Save device configuration...
Archived configurations...
Cancel modifications...
Validate modifications...
Lock device...
Unlock device...
3. Choose the Edit advanced parameters... command.

190 Chapter 4
list of items parameters for item currently selected in the list of items
Figure 4.29: Device configuration dialogue box
Owing to the number of parameters, they are grouped into Items.

The left-hand part of the dialogue box displays the list of items. Selecting an item
displays the associated parameters in the right-hand part of the dialogue box.
The OK button confirms the content of all the pages, the Cancel button undoes the
changes.
Caution:
1. Certain parameters correspond to device sizing. These sizing parameters are used
by the device to allocate memory space on device initialisation. If the parameter
setting is wrong, more memory may be required than is available. In this event, the
device cannot be started up. This is indicated on the front panel of the device.
2. Changes are only effective after validation ( button or Edit/Validate...
command in the menu bar) or, for a number of parameters marked by the
symbol, after rebooting the device.

Chapter 4 191
A prompt is then automatically displayed:
Figure 4.30: Reboot dialogue box
Select the device (a tick should be displayed in front of the device name) then click
on OK.
Figure 4.31: Reboot command

192 Chapter 4
4.5.3.1.1 - “General” item
Figure 4.32: General parameters
Purpose: configure the output signal.

In the Signalling mode area
ISO Only ISO/MPEG2 tables (PAT, PMT, CAT) are sent
in the outgoing signal (in compliance with the MPEG2
ISO 13818-1: “Generic Coding of Moving Pictures
and Associated Audio: Systems” standard).
ISO (with NIT in PAT) If DVB SI signalling is injected by an external device,
the encoder generates MPEG2 tables (PAT, PMT,
CAT) with mention of the NIT (PID = 16 in decimal)
in the PAT.
PSIP terrestrial Reserved for ATSC. If selected, a PSIP Signalling
item replaces DVB Signalling in the left-hand Items
list.
PSIP cable Reserved for ATSC. Same remark as for PSIP
terrestrial above.
DVB The device also generates and transmits DVB tables
(NIT, SDT, EIT, TDT, TOT).
Without signalling The device transmits no signalling.

Chapter 4 193
In the Frequency Area area

50 Hz / 60 Hz The commands in certain dialogue boxes depend on
the chosen standard: video source PAL/SECAM or
NTSC if presence of the DPSN or COMPIN board,
video resolution, etc.
In the Alarm relay area
Alarm relay triggers on major alarms
The alarm relay on the MDSL board is activated by
major alarms.
Alarm relay triggers on major or minor alarms
The alarm relay on the MDSL board is activated by
major and minor alarms.
This area is enabled if the Alarm relay closure hardware option (N41HMSDLAK)
has been installed.

194 Chapter 4
4.5.3.1.2 - “Output” item
Figure 4.33: Parameters related to output
Purpose: set the output signal.

In the Output clock area
Internally synthesised The MPEG output signal rate is given by an adjustable
internal frequency synthesiser. It is possible, using the
Set command two lines below, to optimise the rate by
minimising the number of null packets sent by the
encoder. The calculation takes into account the values
of the component rates generated by the device as well
as the rates allocated to signalling and ECM.
Notes:
1. If the TS output is exceeded, the component rate must
not be increased. If this is the case, firstly reduce the
component rate. It is necessary to increase first the TS
output and then the component rate.
2. If the Set command does not take into account the
Output clock changes when you modify the Max bitrate
value. For example:

Chapter 4 195
- Change the Max bitrate value,

- Click on the OK button and close the window,
- Open the window and click on Set command,
- Validate the changes.
Optimal frequency Minimum clock frequency of the TS for transmitting

the defined service. This frequency can be calculated
with the Set button. It can be useful to help recording
the TS output on a server.
In the Maximum Bitrates area
Signalisation This value sets the alarm generation threshold and
reserves the output rate required to send the signalling.
When the equipment output rate is low, it is necessary
to make adjustments to optimise the reserved rate. The
maximum value is 3Mbit/s.
ECM Used for alarm generation.
In the TS packet size area, the operator can choose the size of packets multiplexed
in the outgoing TS.
188 bytes This button corresponds to the standardised TS packet
size, conforming to the MPEG2 ISO 13818-1:
“Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and Associated
Audio: Systems” standard.
188+16 bytes The device adds 16 stuffing bytes after each 188 byte
packet. This mode may be used when the device is
connected to a satellite or cable modulator. The
modulator then replaces these bytes by Reed-Solomon
error correcting code.
Note: When the ISMB board is used, TS packets must be in

188 + 16 form.

196 Chapter 4
4.5.3.1.3 - “Encoders” item
Figure 4.34: Parameters related to encoders
Purpose: set internal encoding elements (video, audio, teletext).
In the Service encoder area

LTW offset This parameter (Legal Time Window Offset)
indicates to any subsequent multiplexer the
procedure for using the Buffer BSmux of decoder
model T-STD for that TS flow.
In the Video compression area, the Mode parameter determines the mode which
will be used to extract compressed frames from decoder buffers.
Leak Extraction is conditioned by PTS/DTS time stamps.
VBV delay (Video Buffering Verifier)
Not available in this version.

Chapter 4 197
In the PCR clock generation area

Internal reference The clock is generated by the encoder’s internal
oscillator.
Synchronized on PCR ... The clock is generated by the encoder’s internal
oscillator. The oscillator is synchronised with an
incoming PCR on the TS input defined by PID xxxx.
In the Audio delay matching for Multi Encoder Service (MES) area,
In the case of Multi-Encoder services, several encoders are cascaded but only one of
them generates the video component. The others generate the audio components.
The settings for this area adjust the audio delay according to the video delay in the
encoder that generates the video component, thus producing correct
synchronisation (lipsync). This delay depends on the video encoder’s configuration.
This encoder does not generate the MES video component The encoder does not
generate the video compenent and the delays defined
in the following 2 settings are enabled.
Configuring the encoder that generates the MES video:
SuperEncoder filtering Off: The video encoder is not fitted with a
SuperEncoder board.
with C1P: The first encoding pass function of the
SuperEncoder board in the video encoder is enabled.
with C1P & RDB: The first encoding pass and Noise
Reduction functions of the SuperEncoder board in the
video encoder are enabled.
without C1P & RDB: The first encoding pass and
Noise Reduction functions of the SuperEncoder board
in the video encoder are disabled.
Analog video board type
defines the analogue video board type used by the
video encoder.
No analog video board: The video comes from the
digital signal.
DPSN: The video is injected onto the DPSN board.
COMPIN with synchro off: The video is injected onto
the COMPIN board with internal board
synchronisation.
COMPIN with synchro on: The video is injected onto

198 Chapter 4
the COMPIN board and is synchronised by an external

signal.
In the SuperEncoder Board area,
This area is never enabled with a 4110 encoder.

Chapter 4 199
4.5.3.1.4 - “Data injection” item
Figure 4.35: Parameters related to data injection
Purpose: set data injection by the TCP DVB protocol.
In the Data or EMM injection using DVB Simulcrypt area
Service port Used for data or EMM injection with the DVB
simulcrypt protocol, this field specifies the port used
for data injection in TCP mode and bandwidth
negotiation in UDP mode. In UDP mode, bandwidth
negotiation is optional.
Value between 0 and 65535.
Default value: 32000. If changed a device reboot is
necessary.

200 Chapter 4
4.5.3.1.5 - “Scrambler” item
Figure 4.36: Parameters related to scrambler
Purpose: scrambling and access control configuration.

In the General scrambling area
ECM repetition rate This parameter sets the rate of ECM messages.

Chapter 4 201
4.5.3.1.6 - “SAM card” item
Figure 4.37: Parameters related to SAM card
Purpose: generating and authenticating control words.

In the SAM card area
Detachable The Detachable SAM card function is not available
for encoders and hence greyed out.
Integrated Generation and authentication of control words is
performed by software installed in the equipment
which emulates an external SAM card. The set-up
of an external SAM card therefore becomes
unnecessary.

202 Chapter 4
4.5.3.1.7 - “Access control” item
Figure 4.38: Parameters related to Access Control
Purpose: assigning Access Control management, irrelevant in a Stand-Alone

context.
In the Access control area
None The services or components are not subject to
Access Control (VIACCESS or SIMULCRYPT).
External Select this field when the services or components
are subject to Access Control (VIACCESS or
SIMULCRYPT). Access Control is managed by the
DBS 29xx Channel Controller (MCC).

Chapter 4 203
4.5.3.1.8 - “SIMS” item
Figure 4.39: Parameters related to SIMS
Purpose: configure connections between the encoder and a SIMS (Signalisation

Information Management System).
In the Signalisation Management System Identification area
IP Address Address of the SIMS. The network and sub-network
fields must be identical to those in the encoder IP
address.
In the Inform SIMS about the broadcast signalisation area
No This command disables the link from the encoder to
the SIMS.
Yes This command enables the link from the encoder to the
SIMS. Unless otherwise indicated in the Non standard
port field, the link uses standard port 2005.
Non standard port Text box to input the value of a different port to the
standard port.
In the Broadcast SIMS signalisation area
No This command disables the link from the SIMS to the
encoder.

204 Chapter 4
Yes This command enables the link from the SIMS to the
encoder. Unless otherwise indicated in the Non
standard port field, the link uses standard port 2006.
Non standard port Text box to input the value of a different port to the
standard port.
DVB Signalling Master This command forces insertion of the SDTactual and
EIT from the SIMS.
Caution:
It is essential that closed socket detection time-out by SIGMA SI is one minute
instead of two hours, as by default on a PC. If the time-out remains at two hours, a
reset encoder cannot establish a connection with SIGMA until the two hours are up.
4.5.3.1.9 - “Time” item
Figure 4.40: Parameters related to time
Purpose: time setting. The time supported by the device is UTC time.

Chapter 4 205
In the Time setting area

Manual Equipment time setting is performed from the
commands on the front panel of the device.
Automatic. Set up by messages broadcast on port:
Equipment time setting is performed from messages
received on the Ethernet link providing UTC time. The
messages are sent by the {GALET} UTC Time
Broadcaster software installed on the Operating
station. {GALET} software is an option. Port 4000 is
the default reception port.
Automatic. Set up by TDT table received on input:
Available for devices featuring the TS input option.
In the Local time offset for front panel area

Local time - UTC time This parameter sets the current difference between
local time displayed on the front panel and UTC time.
New offset Values of time change update.

Valid from (dd/mm/yyyy) Date of time change update.

206 Chapter 4
4.5.3.1.10 - “TBS Signalling” item
Figure 4.41: Parameters related to TBS signalling
Purpose: set table broadcasting frequency.

In the MDT table area
Generate MDT In order to support the detection of service failure,
provide information for remedial measures and
efficiently log such events, a transport mechanism, the
Multiplex Diagnostic Table (MDT) has been defined
by SES (Société Européenne des Satellites). This
system will serve to convey diagnostic information
about the consistency of all DVB/MPEG-2
multiplexes on ASTRA to the central DINO in
Betzdorf. The MDT can be generated by the encoder to
signal missing streams (e.g. video, audio, subtitle or
accompanied data) or Service Information components
(e.g. NIT, SDT, EIT or TDT) within the multiplex.
In the INBAND command parameters area

ICT Repetition rate Repetition rate of the private ICT table used to
transport INBAND commands. The default value is
0.5s.
Component stream Value used by the encoder to indicate the stream type
of the INBAND COMMAND components in the
service PMTs. The default value is 170.

Chapter 4 207
In the INBAND command management area
Execute commands Check this box if the device is to process or ignore the
INBAND commands it receives.
Default value: On.
Don't forward commands Check this box if the device is to filter all INBAND
commands received. This parameter does not affect
INBAND commands created on the device.
Default value: On.
Notes:
The parameters in the INBAND command management and INBAND Splicing com-
mand areas are only visible on devices featuring at least one TS input.
The Inband command is irrelevant for the DBE 4110 encoder.

208 Chapter 4
4.5.3.1.11 - “ISO Signalling” item
Figure 4.42: Parameters related to ISO signalling

This panel is used to set the recurrence of PSI (PAT, PMT, CAT) table transmission
in the output signal.
In the TS identification area
Original_network_id and Transport_stream_id
These parameters identify the output flow in a unique
way (there must be no two flows with the same
Original_network_id/Transport_stream_id). These
parameters are inserted in the internal signalling tables
and the external source EITactual signalling tables.

Chapter 4 209
4.5.3.1.12 - “DVB Signalling” item
Figure 4.43: Parameters related to DVB signalling

Repetition rates of DVB actual tables area
This panel is used to set the recurrence of DVB (NIT,
SDT, TOT, BAT, TDT, EITp/f, EITs) table
transmission in the output signal.
Notes:
1. When a table or sub-table is externally loaded with a
defined repetition rate, it is no longer affected by these
default values.
2.When a sub-table is loaded in an multiplexer to replace a
previous one, the replacement actually happens when the
previous equivalent sub-table has been transmitted in full
(i.e. after the last section of the sub-table). In the meantime,
the new sub-table is stored but not transmitted. In addition,
each sub-table has to be sent at least once to avoid
discontinuity of version numbers. Various side effects
ensue:

210 Chapter 4
- in the intermediate stage, the two sub-tables co-exist and

take up space in the device buffers,
- if another equivalent sub-table is loaded in the
intermediate stage, there will be three sub-tables in the
memory,
- if EITs (with a very slow broadcast rate) are loaded very
quickly, it is possible to end up with a number of equivalent
tables at the same time which may require several seconds
to clear. For example, when five EIT tables are loaded very
quickly (with a repetition rate of 10 seconds), the last one
loaded will be transmitted 40 to 50 seconds after loading.
3. Only the EIT_schedule 80 to 84 tables are supported by
devices (equivalent to 20 days of programme guide).
Generate TSDT area

The TSDT table is an ISO table, the contents of which
are defined by DVB. This table is used in DSNG
applications where editing of the SI tables in the field
may be impossible due to operational problems
(compliant with ETS prEN 301 210 standard). The
TSDT is used to identify the transmitting satellite
station.
The station identification parameter entered here is
displayed on the front panel of the encoder.
Repetition rates of DVB other tables area
This panel is used to set the recurrence of DVB other
table transmission in the output signal.

Chapter 4 211
4.5.3.1.13 - “PSIP Signalling” item
This item is displayed in place of "DVB Signalling" if in the General area the
PSIP terrestrial or PSIP cable box is checked. The "PSIP Signalling" item is
reserved for standard ATSC.
4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click
on the button to cancel the changes).

212 Chapter 4
4.5.3.2 - Modulator parameters

, Procedure for editing modulator parameters
1. Select the device.
commands.

NIT >
TOT >
Lock device...
Unlock device...
3. Choose the Edit modulator parameters... command.

Chapter 4 213
The following dialogue box displays modulator parameters.
Figure 4.44: Modulator parameters
The Output parameters area consists of the following fields:

Roll-off Automatic, selects 35% for DVB-QPSK modes and
26% for NTC-8PSK and NTC-16 QAM modes.
Convolution QPSK 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 6/7, 7/8.
8PSK 2/3, 5/6, 8/9.
16QAM 3/4, 7/8.
IF/RF level Default value: -20dBm

Min: -20dBm. Max: +5dBm
Note: the 0.5dBm level step is not managed by the
DBS 2930.
Frequency (IF/RF) Default value: 70MHz

Min: 50MHz. Max: 180MHz
Note: the 125Hz frequency step is not managed by the
DBS 2930.
L_Band level Default value: -20dBm

Min: -20dBm. Max: +5dBm
Note: the 0.5dBm level step is not managed by the
DBS 2930.

214 Chapter 4
Frequency (L_Band) Default value: 1140MHz

Min: 950MHz. Max: 1750MHz
Note: the 1kHz frequency step is managed by the
DBS 2930.
The Output control area consists of the following fields:

Transmission/Modulation On, Pure carrier or Off.
Spectral inversion On or Off.
The Information area consists of the following consult fields:

Input bitrate, Packet size, Symbol rate, Bandwidth.
4. Click on OK.
on the button to cancel the changes). Two dialogue boxes will then be displayed
in turn for you to confirm your entry.

Chapter 4 215
4.5.3.3 - NIT table

The {Technical Configuration} application has a function for editing the NITactual
(Network Information Table) and different options such as descriptor modification
or deletion and saving of tables in file format.
The NITactual consists of descriptors related to the actual network (the actual
network is the network to which the Transport Stream from the device belongs) and
to the various TSs in the network.
Descriptors must be added in compliance with the DVB standard set out in the
reference document ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service Information (SI) in
Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems".
The NITactual allows decoders to find the list of channels and services belonging to
the current network.
4.5.3.3.1 - Edit the NIT
, Procedure
commands.

NIT >
TOT >
Lock device...
Unlock device...

216 Chapter 4
3. Choose the NIT > command.
Edit...
Save...
Load...
4. Choose the Edit... command.

A dialogue box will be displayed containing the contents of the table.
Figure 4.45: Editing the NIT
The dialogue box contains two parts:

• Descriptors: display of descriptors for the network and Transport Streams
(TS).
• Parameters: display of parameters relating to the item selected in the
Descriptors part.
Notes:
• There is only one Networkactual item.
• A NITactual network may contain several TSs.
• A Network or TS item can contain several descriptors.

Chapter 4 217
, Procedure for editing a network descriptor

1. Select the existing Network item in the Descriptors side of the dialogue box
(Figure 4.45 page 216).
2. Enter the Network ID in the Parameters side of the dialogue box as required.
3. Click on the Add... button.
A new dialogue box is displayed:
Figure 4.46: Add a Descriptor or Transport Stream item
4. Choose the Descriptor option and click on OK.

The dialogue box displayed can be used to select the required network descriptor.
Figure 4.47: Editing a descriptor
5. Select the required option. The pull-down Standard option allows a choice
between the various descriptors in the dialogue box: network_name,
ML_network_name, linkage, private_data_specifier and stuffing. These descriptors
are defined in the reference document ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service
Information (SI) in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems". Click on OK.

218 Chapter 4
The initial dialogue box will display the selected descriptors on the left-hand
Descriptors side.
6. Fill in the fields specific to the descriptor.
7. Repeat the last four steps for each required descriptor.
8. Click on OK.
Editing a Transport Stream descriptor

To edit a TS descriptor the TS item has to be created beforehand and then edited via
TS item descriptor editing.
, Procedure to create the Transport Stream item

1. Select the Network item on the Descriptors side of the dialogue box (Figure 4.45
page 216).
3. Choose the Transport stream option in the dialogue box (Figure 4.46) and click
on OK. The Original Network ID set by default is that of the network. The TS ID
entered must be between 1 and 65535.
, Procedure to edit or add a descriptor in the TS item

1. Select the TS item on the Descriptors side of the dialogue box (Figure 4.45 page
216).
3. Choose the Descriptor option in the dialogue box (Figure 4.46) and click on OK.
4. Choose one of the various descriptors that appears in the dialogue box:
cable_delivery, satellite_delivery, terrestrial_delivery, frequency_list,
private_data_specifier, service_list and stuffing. These descriptors are defined in
the reference document ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service Information (SI) in
Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems". Click on OK.

Chapter 4 219
5. Fill in the fields specific to the descriptor.

6. Repeat the last four steps for each required descriptor.
7. Click on OK.
4.5.3.3.2 - Changing descriptors
, Procedure for changing a network or TS descriptor

1. Select the descriptor to be changed in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box
2. Change the parameters in the right-hand Parameters part of the dialogue box.
3. Click on OK.
4.5.3.3.3 - Deleting descriptors
, Procedure for deleting a network descriptor

1. Select the descriptor to be deleted in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box
2. Click on the Remove... button.
3. Click on OK.

220 Chapter 4
4.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT
When the new configuration is activated, the NIT is inserted in the TS output flow.
This table is stored by the equipment.
The application offers the additional possibility of saving the NITs in file format
(save on PC or another storage medium) as, for example, when upgrading the
software version, the saved memory is reset and the previous configuration is lost
for the saved NIT. The NIT then requires reloading from the {Technical
Configuration} application.
, Procedure for saving a NIT
commands.

NIT >
TOT >
Lock device...
Unlock device...
3. Choose the NIT... command.
Edit...
Save...
Load...
4. Choose the Save... command.

A dialogue box is displayed to enter the parameters required for saving the file, i.e.
the file name and a comment associated with the file.

Chapter 4 221
Figure 4.48: Saving a NIT
There is no point in giving a file extension, as the software adds the extension (.dvb)
to all saved NIT files.
The file will be saved in the directory indicated in the dialogue box. The directory
can be changed by clicking on the Browse... button.
, Procedure for loading a NIT

commands.

NIT >
TOT >
Lock device...
Unlock device...

222 Chapter 4
3. Choose the NIT... command.
Edit...
Save...
Load...
4. Choose the Load... command.

A dialogue box is displayed for choosing the saved file to be used.
Figure 4.49: Loading a saved file
The dialogue box shows the configurations available in the current directory.

Chapter 4 223
4.5.3.4 - TOT table

The TOT is a DVB signalling table which gives the offsets between local time and
UTC time for a list of countries. This table must be changed before the clocks
change from summer to winter time and vice versa.
4.5.3.4.1 - Edit the TOT
, Procedure
commands.

NIT >
TOT >
Lock device...
Unlock device...
3. Choose the TOT > command.
Edit...
Save...
Load...
4. Choose the Edit... command.

224 Chapter 4
A dialogue box will be displayed containing the contents of the table.
Figure 4.50: Editing the TOT
When creating a TOT it is necessary to declare a Local time offset descriptor, a list
of time offsets will be associated. In a list, the number of elements is limited to 13.
, Procedure for adding a TOT descriptor

2. A second dialogue box is displayed:
Figure 4.51: Add a descriptor

Chapter 4 225
3. Click on OK to add the Local time offset descriptor to the list. The previous
dialogue box will then display the descriptor on the left-hand side as shown below:
Figure 4.52: Editing the TOT
4. Click on Add... in the right-hand panel. A dialogue box will be displayed for you
to select the country concerned. Edit the parameters and click on OK.
Figure 4.53: Adding a time offset
The country and its details will be added to the list of time offsets in the previous
dialogue box. Click on OK.

226 Chapter 4
For the Country field, a list of countries is given by default. But it is possible to type
three characters for the country code which is not proposed in the list.
The lists of default language and country codes can be customised to include
additional languages or countries or restrict default lists to the most common
choices.
These lists can be customised by changing the content of the codes.ini text file in
the DBS 2930 setup directory.
When language or country codes are defined in this file, the DBS 2930 uses these
instead of the default lists regardless of the version (French or English) of the
DBS 2930.
The order in which codes are declared sets the order in which they appear in the
choice lists.
The file format observes Windows .ini file syntax.
Example of a .ini file

[country_code]
FRA=France
[ISO_639_language_code]
est=Estonien
fre=Français
The [country_code] section contains the country codes. The name of each key is the
ISO 8859-1 three-character code for the country. Its value is the text to be displayed
in the list of choices.
The [ISO_639_language_code] section contains the language codes. The name of
each key is the ISO 639 three-character code for the language. Its value is the text to
be displayed in the list of choices.
Lines not observing the specified syntax are ignored.

Chapter 4 227
The procedure for changing and deleting descriptors is similar to that explained for
the NIT.
4.5.3.4.2 - Changing descriptors
, Procedure for changing a TOT descriptor

1. Select the descriptor to be changed in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box
2. Click on Edit... and change the parameters in the right-hand List of time offsets
part of the dialogue box.
3. Click on OK.
4.5.3.4.3 - Deleting descriptors
, Procedure for deleting a TOT descriptor

1. Select the descriptor to be deleted in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box
2. Click on Remove.
3. Click on Yes to confirm your choice.
The TOT table saving and loading functions are identical to those for the NIT (see
section 4.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT page 220) except that the TOT >
command is used instead of NIT >.
As for NITs, the application offers the additional possibility of saving the TOTs in
file format (save on PC or another storage medium) as, for example, when
upgrading the software version, the saved memory is reset and the previous
configuration is lost for the saved TOT. The TOT then requires reloading from the
{Technical Configuration} application.

228 Chapter 4
4.5.3.5 - Saving/Loading a device configuration

The active configuration is stored by the equipment.
The application offers the additional possibility of saving all edited configurations
(not necessarily activated) in file format (save on PC or another storage medium).
, Procedure to save a configuration
commands.

NIT >
TOT >
Lock device...
Unlock device...
3. Choose the Save device configuration... command.

A dialogue box is displayed to enter the parameters required for the saved file, i.e
the file name and a comment associated with the file.
Figure 4.54: Saving a configuration

Chapter 4 229
There is no point in giving a file extension as the software adds the same extension
(.mcf) to all saved files.
The file will be saved in the directory specified in the dialogue box. The directory
can be changed by clicking on the Browse... button.
, Procedure to load a configuration
commands.

NIT >
TOT >
Lock device...
Unlock device...
3. Choose the Load device configuration... command.

230 Chapter 4
A dialogue box is displayed to choose the configuration to use.
Figure 4.55: Loading a device configuration
The dialogue box shows the configurations available in the current directory. The
Browse... button can be used to change directories. Configurations are presented in
list form. For each configuration the following is displayed:
• the name of the file saved,
• the comment made by the operator when the file was saved.
4.5.3.6 - Archived configurations

This menu is used to:
• configure the device with configurations stored in the memory,
• save configurations,
• erase saved configurations.
Caution:
The operator is recommended to save all configurations on PC in addition to those
saved on the DBE 4110. If software is installed subsequently, configurations on the
DBE 4110 may be lost, in which case those saved on PC can be restored to the
device using the Control & Command software.

Chapter 4 231
, Procedure for saving, recalling or clearing configurations

commands.

NIT >
TOT >
Lock device...
Unlock device...
3. Choose the Archived configurations... command.
Figure 4.56: Archived configurations

232 Chapter 4
The Configuration area consists of the following fields:

Name Enter the name of the configuration. It is also possible
to select the number of the configuration directly.
Save Save a current configuration.
Recall Recall a saved configuration.
Clear Clear a saved configuration.
" Concerning the factory-installed configurations

The encoder has three factory-installed configurations accessible by the Recall
command and saved in memories A (SNG-LBR), B (SNG-HBR) and C
(LBR+DATA), which cannot be cleared.
These configurations serve as a base from which users can easily develop their own
configurations.
Note: Not all encoder parameters are set in the factory installed configurations. For
example, 50/60 Hz mode is not taken into account.
The following table gives the values of the parameters taken into account by
factory-set configurations SNG-LBR, SNG-HBR and LBR-DATA.

Chapter 4 233
A (SNG-LBR) B (SNG-HBR) C (LBR+DATA)

SERVICE Service ID 100 100 100
PMT PID 257 257 257
PCR PID 100 100 100
Type Digital TV Digital TV Digital TV
Service (1) Service (1) Service (1)
Name TV TV TV
Provider name None None None
Scrambling Clear mode Clear mode Clear mode
VIDEO Source 4:2:0 MP@ML 4:2:2@ML 4:2:0 MP@ML
PID 100 100 100
Bit Rate 7.6 Mbit/s 20 Mbit/s 9 Mbit/s
Coding No low delay No low delay No low delay
Input SDI SDI SDI
Resolution 720x576 720x576 720x576
GOP 12 12 12
IP frame 3 3 3
Aspect ratio 4/3 4/3 4/3
AUDIO1&2 Input Analog Analog Analog
PID audio 1 110 110 110
PID audio 2 111 111 111
Bit rate 256 kbit/s 384 kbit/s 256 kbit/s
Type Stereo Stereo Stereo
Coding MPEG1 Layer 2 MPEG1 Layer 2 MPEG1 Layer 2
DATA PID Not used Not used 103
Baud rate Not used Not used 9600
Stream type Not used Not used 0x80
TRANSMISSION Symbol rate 6.111 Ms/s 23.333 Ms/s 6.666 Ms/s
Modulation QPSK QPSK QPSK
Code rate 3/4 7/8 7/8
Roll Off Auto Auto Auto
Level -15 dBm -15 dBm -15 dBm
Output Off Air Off Air Off Air
Spectral inversion Off Off Off
Packet size 188 188 204
IF frequency 70 MHz 70 MHz 70 MHz
L-band 1140 MHz 1140 MHz 1140 MHz

234 Chapter 4
A confirmation request is displayed when recalling an archived configuration.
The following dialogue box is then displayed.
Figure 4.58: Validation dialogue box

Chapter 4 235
4.5.3.7 - Cancelling/Validating changes

These commands are used to cancel or confirm changes to a device configuration.
, Procedure for cancelling changes
commands.

NIT >
TOT >
Lock device...
Unlock device...
3. Choose the Cancel modifications... command.

The following dialogue box is displayed:
4. Click on OK.
After confirmation, the command is run and the display reflects the device’s active
configuration.
Note: The button or the Edit/Cancel... command in the menu bar achieve the
same effect.

236 Chapter 4
, Procedure for validating changes

commands.

NIT >
TOT >
Lock device...
Unlock device...
3. Choose the Validate modifications... command. The following dialogue box is

displayed.
4. Click on OK.
After confirmation, the command is run and the display reflects the device’s active
configuration.
The lower right-hand edge of the main window now displays the words "Active
configuration" and the ’pencil’ icon next to the device has disappeared.
Note: The button or the Edit/Validate... command in the menu bar achieve the
same effect.

Chapter 4 237
4.5.3.8 - Device locking / unlocking

For details on this function, please refer to 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking page
165.

238 Chapter 4
4.5.4 - Generated Services
The Generated Services item located underneath the encoder groups together the
services generated locally.
Figure 4.59: Generated Services
The Create a new service... command allows the encoder to generate services such
as TV, radio, mosaic, VBI data, EMM (Entitlement Management Message) or
NVOD (Near Video On Demand).
There are 4 types of components: video, audio, VBI and data.
The following table contains the restrictions for assigning components to services.
The number of components is also limited by the component resources available to
the DBE 4110.
Service Components
video audio VBI data
TV 1 1 or more 0 to 4 0 or more
Radio 0 1 or more 0 0 or more
VBI data 0 0 1 0 or more
Note: The maximum number of audio components is imposed by the encoder model.

Chapter 4 239
4.5.4.1 - TV service
The procedure for creating a TV service using 4 components is as follows:
1. Select Generated Services under the device in the tree structure.
commands.
Create a new service...

Manage ghost components
Not manage ghost components
3. Choose the Create a new service... command.

A dialogue box will be displayed to enter the type of service.
Figure 4.60: Generate a new service
Given the number of parameters to enter, the box contains several panels in
succession accessible via the Next> and <Back buttons.
The Next> button is used to go to the next panel.
The <Back button cancels editing for the current panel and takes you back to the
previous panel.
The OK button confirms the set of parameters and proceeds with generating the
service.

240 Chapter 4
4. In the dialogue box, select the service type TV.

5. Click on Next>.
A dialogue box is displayed to enter parameters relating to the service.
Figure 4.61: Service parameter entry
The Signalisation area contains the following fields:

Service id Service identifier.
The generation of a local service can result in a
transiting service being stopped. This is the case when
the service ID required has already been allocated to a
transiting service. When the service is stopped the
AID_SRV_ID_CONFLICT alarm is raised.
It is not possible to generate a service locally with
service_id 0xFFFF.
Type Select the service type from TV, Radio, Mosaic,
Teletext, NVOD reference and NVOD item.
Name and Provider The decoder uses these character strings to display to
the user the name of the service and the service
provider.
Present and following (EIT)When the EIT present/following flag is set in the SDT
table, this field informs the decoders of the presence or
absence of information (Electronic programme guide)

Chapter 4 241
about the "present" and "following" events of the

service. This private data information is provided by
an external device and transported in the
MPEG2/DVB stream via EITs (Event Information
Tables).
Schedule events (EITs) Same comment as above but concerning "scheduled"
events, i.e. those after the "following" event.
The Multiplex area contains the following fields:
Running status This field offers several broadcasting types. This

parameter is used to insert (or not, as appropriate) the
service and its components in the outgoing TS and
affects the Running Status field in the SDT indicating
service status.
When the running status is off, the corresponding
service will not be output.
PID PMT PID in which the PMT describing the service will be
inserted (a default figure is provided). Services may
use PID PMTs specific to each one or a PID PMT
common to all of them.
PID PCR PID in which the reference clock PCR is transmitted.
The PID of the component carrying the PCR is called
Service PID.
6. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue box.
7. Click on Next>.
A new dialogue box is displayed to select the components to be assigned to the
service.

242 Chapter 4
Figure 4.62: Selection of TV service components
It is possible to select several components.

8. In the Available components box, select the required component(s) (check
boxes).
9. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the three dialogue boxes.
The service created, and its components, are displayed in the main window.
Figure 4.63: Created service display

Chapter 4 243
10. Confirm your choice by clicking on the button.
4.5.4.1.1 - Editing parameters of the video component
, Procedure
1. Select the video component.
2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the component-
specific commands.
Edit parameters...
Remove component...
Edit additional PMT info...

The dialogue box displayed is made up of three panels plus an additional
Acquisition panel if the COMPIN board is used.

244 Chapter 4
General parameters panel
Figure 4.64: Entry of video component parameters (General parameters)
The Source and Profile parameters have the following values:

Source Choice between
• SDI,
• DPSN/PAL BDGHI if 50Hz frequency is set in the
Edit advanced parameters panel, see section 4.5.3.1.1
- “General” item page 192,
• DPSN/SECAM if 50Hz frequency is set in the Edit
advanced parameters panel,
• NTSC M if 60Hz frequency is set in the Edit
advanced parameters panel,
• PATTERN.

Chapter 4 245
Note:
The COMPIN composite video acquisition board gives
access to more acquisition parameters than a DPSN board.
When configuring a video component, the list of sources is
extended and an additional Acquisition page is displayed.
See page 252 for information on this page.
If COMPIN board is used, the following additional

sources are available:
• COMPIN/PAL BDGHI in 50 Hz
(as shown in Figure 4.65),
• COMPIN/NTSC in 60 Hz (as shown in Figure 4.66).
Figure 4.65: COMPIN/PAL BDGHI option in 50Hz
Figure 4.66: COMPIN/NTSC option in 60Hz

246 Chapter 4
Notes:
1. When the Pattern source is selected, the internal PLL is
no longer locked onto the video input, but to a fixed
internal frequency.
In these conditions, the SDI audio source transmitted with
the video signal could give rise to alarms due to
synchronisation problems, thereby creating disturbance in
the sound signal.
2. There is no test to check whether the same PID is used as
the output PID of two transiting components. PID
instructions are considered to be instruction opportunities
and only apply when the components do indeed feature on
input. If however, the two components were to exist at the
same time, one of them would be stopped and an alarm
raised.
Profile Choice between MP@ML and 422P@ML.
The Multiplex parameters area has the following fields:

PID Identification of the TS packets transporting the video
component.
PCR Choice between
• No PCR: the component does not carry the PCR,
• Service PCR: the component is referenced to carry
the service PCR. In this case, the PID of this
component fills the PCR PID field in the Service
dialogue box (Figure 4.61 page 240),
• Contains a PCR: the component carries a PCR
without being referenced to carry the Service PCR. In
this case, each component of the service can carry the
PCR. These facilities mean that in remultiplexing
operations, a TV service containing one video and
several audios may be split into one TV service and
several radio services each containing a single audio
only.
Off air This field is used to suspend transmission of the
component without erasing it from the configuration.

Chapter 4 247
The Compression area has the following fields:

Rate value between 0.5 and 15 Mb/s if MP@ML.
value between 0.5 and 50 Mb/s if 4:2:2 P@ML.
The operator can now set a video bitrate lower than the
minimum bitrate indicated in the DBE 41xx encoder
technical specifications. However, in any case an input
of under 0.5 Mbit/s is rejected.
When exiting the video parameter editing screen, a
warning message requests the operator to confirm
settings. The message specifies the minimum bitrate
recommended by NEXTREAM for information
purposes (i.e. 2 Mbit/s).
Figure 4.67: Warning message
Mode The mode optimises video compression.

In Film mode, encoding and motion prediction are
forced to frame mode because there is no motion
between the 2 interleaved fields making up the frame.
In Video mode, encoding and motion prediction are
forced to field mode.
In Auto mode, the encoder itself sets the best mode
(film or video) having analysed the two interleaved
fields. Only auto mode is capable of correct processing
of a 3:2 pull down film mode (60Hz).
Format Choice between
• Manual: format specified by the field Default value
4:3 or 16:9,
• Automatic WSS: format assignment depends on the
WSS (Wide Screen Signaling) information contained
in the incident 4:2:2 video signal. In case of non-

248 Chapter 4
reception of the WSS signal, the format is specified by

the field Default value 4:3 or 16:9.
Note:
With an SDI source transporting WSS in digital form
(DID/SDID), you must declare the digital WSS in one of
the VBI components (see section 4.5.4.1.3 - Editing
parameters of the VBI component page 264). In any other
case, it is all done automatically.
• Automatic AFD: format assignment depends on the

AFD (Automatic Format Description) information
contained in the incident 4:2:2 video signal. In case of
non-reception of the AFD signal, the format is
specified by the field Default value 4:3 or 16:9.
Note:
The AFD, also known as ARD, was defined by the BBC. It
is the modified "video index" (line 11 and 324 in 50 Hz and
14 and 277 in 60 Hz) which supplies, among other things,
information on image format (4:3, 16:9). The AFD can
only be received in a video from the SDI input.
The Aspect ratio default value is used until the AFD data
has been received. Once the AFD has been detected, the
image format is determined by the AFD data. Unlike WSS,
when the AFD data disappears, the image format keeps the
format contained in the AFD (it does not revert to the
default format).

Chapter 4 249
Advanced parameters panel
Figure 4.68: Entry of video component parameters (Advanced parameters)

P picture period (M) and GOP size (N)
The P picture period (M) parameter, from 1 to 3 and
always less than the N parameter, defines the
recurrence of non-bidirectional pictures (P pictures).
Note: In low delay mode, the P picture period (M)

parameter is forced to 1.
The GOP size (N) parameter, from M value to 24,

defines recurrence of Intra pictures (I pictures).
Examples of GOP M/N with B referring to
bidirectional predicted pictures:
GOP M=3, N=12: IBBPBBPBBPBBI
GOP M=1, N=4: IPPPI

250 Chapter 4
Picture resolution This field allows the picture resolution to be reduced in

the event of a low video rate. The picture resolution
depends on the picture rate:
In 50 Hz,
352 pixels x 288 lines
In 60 Hz,
Compression delay Normal, Low or Ultra low (flag in the TS packet
header).
Use closed GOP mode The first B pictures of a GOP (just after intra pictures)
are predicted with "backward-only" mode in order to
allow bitstream editing.
PES info Define the Priority (Normal or High), Copyright
(With or Without) and Content (Original or Copy)
(flag in the TS packet header) for PES information.

Chapter 4 251
Optimal configurations:
1. Normal mode
MP@ML 422@ML
Max bit rate 15 Mb/s 50 Mb/s
Min 720 pixels: 2 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s 4 Mb/s (regardless of GOP
recommended 702 pixels: 2 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s structure)
bit rate / Min 544 pixels: 1.5 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s
bitrate allowed 480 pixels: 1.5 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s
352 pixels: 1 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s
SIF: 1 Mb/s (regardless of GOP
structure) / 0.5Mb/s
Optimal GOP bit rate<8 Mb/s: 12/3 4Mb/s<bit rate<8Mb/s: 12/3
structure bit rate>8 Mb/s: 12/2 8Mb/s<bit rate<15Mb/s: 12/2
15Mb/s<bitrate<30Mb/s: 8/1
bit rate>30Mb/s: 2/1
2. Low delay mode (for remote interviews)
MP@ML 422@ML
Min 4 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s 6 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s
recommended bit rate /
Min bitrate allowed
Optimal GOP 12/1 6Mb/s<bitrate<15Mb/s: 12/1
structure 15Mb/s<bitrate<30Mb/s: 8/1
bit rate>30Mb/s: 2/1
3. Ultra low delay mode
MP@ML 422@ML
Min 6 Mb/s 0.5Mb/s 6 Mb/s 0.5Mb/s
recommended bit rate
/ Min bitrate allowed
Fixed GOP 1/1
structure

252 Chapter 4
Notes:
1. The low delay software option (N41SLODE), installed as standard, is required for
access to Ultra Low Delay mode.
2. When Ultra Low Delay mode is activated, sound and image synchronisation is not
guaranteed with audio components from AMUSE boards. In addition, M and N parameters
are forced to 1 (the video contains only I images).
Acquisition parameters panel
Figure 4.69: Entry of video component parameters (Acquisition parameters)
The Analog video conversion area has the following fields:
VTR mode Check the box if the composite signal comes from a
VTR not featuring a TBC (Time Base Corrector) or if
it is very poor quality.
Default value: Off.
External synchro Check the box to enable the internal frame

Chapter 4 253
synchroniser.
Default value: Off
The NTSC conversion area has the following fields:
Check the Standard pedestal box if the NTSC signal

features a pedestal as per ITU-R 470 standard.
Default value: Standard pedestal.
This parameter is only visible if the source is
COMPIN/NTSC.
VBI parameters panel
Figure 4.70: Entry of video component parameters (VBI parameters)
Use VITC/DVITC The VITC/DVITC information contains a time-code.

After extraction from the video field blanking (digital
or analogue) the VITC/DVITC is transmitted in the

254 Chapter 4
MPEG2 video component. The DVITC must be

carried by one line only (between line 6 and line 22).
Notes:
1. The N41SVBIP (VBI Processing) option is required to
obtain this function.
2. VITC/DVITC in DID/SDID form cannot be processed
by the encoder.
4. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue boxes and click on OK.

Chapter 4 255
4.5.4.1.2 - Editing parameters of the audio component
, Procedure
1. Select the audio component.
specific commands.
Edit parameters...
Remove component...

A dialogue box is displayed allowing parameters relating to the audio component to
be edited.
General audio panel
Figure 4.71: Entry of audio component (general parameters)

256 Chapter 4
The Source area consists of the following fields:

Source and Group/Channel (the latter only if the SDI source is selected):
The source of the signal to be processed depends on
• the audio component number,
• presence of the AMuSE board,
• presence of the ATADI board.
Note: It is possible to configure the audio components using the compressors of the
AMUSE board to produce an audio test signal. To do this, select Pattern in the list of
sources in the audio component parameter editing screen.
The audio sources are summarised in the following table:
Component Encoder name Possible source Mandatory conditions

Board/Audio
compressor
Audio 1 [SSEB/AUD1] SDI /Group x/Channel 1
Analog 1
PATTERN
ATADI/Balanced 1 ATADI present
ATADI/Unbalanced 1 ATADI present
Audio 2 [SSEB/AUD2] SDI /Group x/Channel 2
Analog 2
PATTERN
ATADI/Balanced 2 ATADI present
ATADI/Unbalanced 2 ATADI present
Audio 3 [AMU2/AUD1] SDI/Group u/Channel 1 AMUSE present in slot 2
Balanced 1 AMUSE present in slot 2
Unbalanced 1 AMUSE present in slot 2
Audio 4 [AMU2/AUD2] SDI/Group u/Channel 2 AMUSE present in slot 2
Audio 5 [AMU2/AUD3] SDI/Group v/Channel 1 AMUSE present in slot 2
Audio 6 [AMU2/AUD4] SDI/Group v/Channel 2 AMUSE present in slot 2

Chapter 4 257
Note concerning the audio source names from the SDI input.
An SDI signal can contain up to 16 mono audio channels. Two mono audios consti-
tute an AES/EBU channel. AES/EBU channels are grouped in pairs and each pair
forms a group.
The reference of the AES/EBU channel is made up of the group number (1 to 4) and
the number of the AES/EBU channel in the pair (1 or 2).
Mono Stereo Groups
Audio 1/1
Group 1
Audio 1/2
Audio 2/1
Group 2
Audio 2/2
Audio 3/1
Group 3
Audio 3/2
Audio 4/1
Group 4
Audio 4/2
Comments:
1. SSEB board:
The SSEB board includes 2 stereo audio compressors, thus enabling two stereo audios in
the output signal (stereo audios 1 and 2). The possible sources for the each stereo audio are
as follows:
• the SSEB board SDI input;
• the SSEB board analogue input.
When the SDI input is selected, a group number must be supplied. This number identifies
the group to which the stereo audio belongs. When the source of the two stereo audios 1
and 2 is SDI, SSEB board internal wiring requires both stereo audios to be taken from the
same group (one de-embedder for each pair of stereo audios).

258 Chapter 4
2. ATADI board (option N41HATADAK):

When this board is present, the list of possible sources for the audio 1 and audio 2
components contains two additional options:
• the balanced digital input;
• the unbalanced digital input.
When the audio 1 and 2 source is a digital input, ATADI board internal wiring requires
both inputs to be of the same type (Balanced or Unbalanced).
3. AMuSE board (option N41HAMUBAK):

The AMuSE board is now dual-standard, i.e. MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby AC-3. It is
capable of packetising up to four Dolby AC-3 sounds from external audio encoders, or up
to four sounds in MPEG-1 Layer II standard
It is not possible to combine MPEG-1 Layer II encoding and Dolby AC-3 packetising with
the same AMuSE board. The four audio channels on the AMuSE board are configured in
either MPEG-1 Layer II or Dolby AC-3.
In both cases, for each audio, the source options are as follows:
the AMuSE board SDI input;
the AES balanced digital input;
the AES unbalanced digital input.
When SDI input is selected, a group number must be supplied. This number identifies the
group to which the audio component belongs.
Some restrictions apply:
1. When the audio compressor 1 and 2 sources come from the SDI signal, internal wiring
of the AMuSE board requires selection of the same group for the two sources. This rule
also applies to compressor 3 and 4 sources. The SDI source (with AC-3 audio) must be
synchronous with the one sent to the video encoder (SSEB board).
2. When the audio compressor sources are AES digital inputs, internal wiring of the
AMuSE board requires all AES inputs to be of the same type (balanced or unbalanced).
When either of these sources is used, the external Dolby encoder must be genlocked
through the synchronisation output from the REF OUT connector on the AMuSE board.
4. PATTERN signal:
The audio test signal consists in the transmission of a 2100 Hz frequency signal at 0 dBFS
(full scale level).
Be careful when using the audio test signal, as it produces a very loud sound.
Note: In pre-compressed AC-3 mode, the AMuSE board does not generate an internal
audio test signal.

Chapter 4 259
The Multiplex area has the following fields:

PID Identification of the TS packets transporting the audio
component.
PCR Choice between
• No PCR: the component does not carry the PCR,
• Service PCR: the component is referenced to carry
the service PCR. In this case, the PID of this
component fills the PCR PID field in the Service
dialogue box (Figure 4.61 page 240),
• Contains a PCR: the component carries a PCR
without being referenced to carry the Service PCR. In
this case, each component of the service can carry the
PCR. These facilities mean that in remultiplexing
operations, a radio service containing several audios
may be split into several radio services each containing
a single audio only.

Standard MPEG1 Layer II or Dolby AC-3. The Dolby standard
is only available when an audio component has been
selected from the AMuSE board.
Mode Stereo, Joint stereo, Mono or Dual channel.
Note concerning activation of Dual PID mode for

Monophonic Audio Channels.
1. In the main {Technical Configuration} window select
or add a first audio component from a compressor on the
SSEB board (SSEB/AUD1 or SSEB/AUD2);
2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu
containing the device specific commands;
3. Choose the Edit parameters... command;
4. Set the audio component mode to Mono left or Mono
right;
5. Add a new component (using Add components... in the
shortcut menu);
6. Select the same compressor. The component’s mode will
automatically be set to mono-left if the first is in mono-
right and vice versa. The two components are transported

260 Chapter 4
in TS packets with distinct PIDs.

Any change made to the compression parameters (Source,
VPS, Alignment level, Headroom, Additional delay
("Advanced" window below) applies to both components.
To change an audio mono-left or mono-right component to
an audio stereo, joint-stereo or dual channel component,
the other mono component must be deinstalled.
Rate Choice between 64kb/s, 96kb/s, 128kb/s, 192kb/s,

256kb/s and 384kb/s according to the mode (MPEG
standard does not allow any Mode/Rate combination).
VPS automatic mode In MPEG Layer II compression mode, VPS
information contained in the incident 4:2:2 video
signal can be used to control automatic selection of the
audio mode and the bitrate. When automatic VPS
mode is validated, the input values in the Compression
mode fields are default values that are only applied in
the absence of VPS information.
Note:
With an SDI source transporting VPS in digital form
(DID/SDID), you must declare the digital VPS in one of
the VBI components (see section 4.5.4.1.3 - Editing
parameters of the VBI component page 264). In any other
case, it is all done automatically.
Alignment level and Headroom

For analogue audio source only:
The maximum input level is the analogue level in dBU
with input saturation. After conversion, a digital level
of 0 dBFS is produced. Two parameters are used to set
the maximum input level: alignment level and
headroom.
Alignment is the level in dBU which corresponds to
0VU. It can be set between 0 and 4 dBU in 1 dBU
steps.
Headroom is the difference in dB between alignment
level and input saturation. It can be set between 8 and
20 dB in 1 dB steps.
Physically, the analogue audio input saturation level
corresponds to alignment level + headroom in dBU.

Chapter 4 261
For example, the alignment level is +4dBU and the

headroom 20dB, the 0 dBFS corresponds to +24 dBU.
Advanced audio panel
Figure 4.72: Entry of audio component (advanced parameters)
Additional delay This parameter is used to adjust the phase of the audio
component with respect to the video component.
The additional delay is used to recover a correct
lipsync when a non-standard decoder is used.
The accuracy of the value in ms is not guaranteed.
Do not use the additional delay to compensate bad
audio/video synchronisation of the encoder service
signal.
Please reboot the DBE 4110 after changing the
additional delay.
The additional delay should remain set to 0, which
corresponds to a correct lipsync (tested with an
MSU 4422 decoder).
However, in certain conditions the TS bitrate used by

262 Chapter 4
audio components from an AMUSE board can be

reduced by adjusting the Additional Delay setting. TS
packetisation is optimised when this parameter is set to
+350 ms (see table below).
IO bitrate TS bitrate (kbit/s)

(kbit/s)
SSEB audio AMUSE audio
Additional Delay < 50ms Additional Delay = 350ms
64 70 125 70
128 135 186 135
192 205 250 205
This change is only possible when an MPEG 1 Layer

II coded audio component is attached to a service not
containing any video component (radio service for
instance). The Additional Delay parameter can then be
set between –50ms and +350ms instead of -
50ms/+50ms.
The DBS 2930 performs the following checks:
- when editing the parameters of an audio component,
the value of the Additional Delay parameter is
checked;
- when adding a component to a service, addition of a
video component is rejected if the service contains an
audio component from an AMuSE board with an
Additional Delay value of above 50ms.
Figure 4.73: Error message

Chapter 4 263
PES info Define the Copyright (With or Without) or Content

(Original or Copy) (flag in the TS packet header) for
PES information.

5. Click on OK.

264 Chapter 4
4.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component
The encoders can extract certain VBI data from the incident video signal and
transmit them in one to four VBI components in DVB form with different PIDs.
Caution: It is forbidden to declare the same VBI line in several VBI component
TSs.
The VBI data transport syntax is compliant with the DVB standard set out in the
reference document ETS 300472 "Specification for conveying ITU-R System B
Teletext in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) bitstreams" extended by the TM1952
proposal (October 21, 1997) and a proprietary protocol.
VBI inserter
The VBI module is capable of processing ancillary data from either the SDI or the
PAL input. The following diagrams describe the different ways ancillary data can or
cannot be processed:

Chapter 4 265
Diagram 1 VBI
PAL
video
SDI
video + VBI
Diagram 2 PAL
SDI
Diagram 3 PAL
video + VBI
SDI
Diagram 4 video
PAL
VBI SDI
Diagram 5 VBI
PAL
video + VBI SDI
Figure 4.74: Ancillary data processing
• Diagram 1 shows a VBI inserter function. VBI information from the compo-
site video signal is conveyed in the TS bitstream as described in DVB standard.
The composite video signal must be externally synchronised with the SDI
video source.
• Diagrams 2 and 3 illustrate a common setup.
• Diagram 4 shows a configuration similar to diagram 1 but which is not
supported.
• Diagram 5 illustrates the fact that the DBE 4110 cannot simultaneously
process VBI information coming from both video inputs.

266 Chapter 4
The VBI processor capabilities are given in a table in Chapter 1 Specifications page
21.
Caution:
Data cannot be encoded simultaneously according to 50Hz and 60Hz MPEG-2 standard.
Notes:
1. Each CEEFAX B, VPS, WSS can be mapped into its individual PID (max. 4 PID) or all
the previous can be mapped together into the same PID.
2. The same VBI line cannot be associated with different PIDs.
, Procedure
1. Select the VBI component.
specific commands.
Edit parameters...
Remove component...

Chapter 4 267
A dialogue box is displayed allowing parameters relating to the VBI component to

be entered.
Figure 4.75: Entry of VBI component parameters
The VBI source area consists of the following fields:

Source Choice between
• SDI source from SSEB or AMuSE board,
• Composite source from DPSN or COMPIN board.
Format The VBI data can be in Modulated form or in Digital
form. The Modulated Information or Digital
Information fields concern all the lines of the VBI
component.
Modulated indicates that the incoming ancillary data
are in the form of analogue signals sampled at
13.5MHz (digitalised waveform VBI). This is the case
when
• DPSN source is selected,
• COMPIN source is selected,
• SDI source is selected with an SDI signal supplied
by an upstream DBI 2000 AVA (Audio Video
Acquisition) device if the VBI processing module
operates in transparent mode.

268 Chapter 4
Digital means that the ancillary data are in 4:2:2 field

blanking in 10 bit word form with DID/SDID
identifiers (compliant with the SMPTE 291M
specification "Ancillary data packet and space
formatting") and data flows are analysed. This is the
case when SDI source is selected with an SDI signal
supplied by an upstream DBI 2000 AVA (Audio Video
Acquisition) device if the VBI processing module
operates in DID/SDID mode.
This function is unavailable when the analogue video
input from the DPSN or COMPIN board is selected.
The Multiplex area consists of the following fields:
PID Identification of the TS packets transporting the VBI
component.
Edit the parameters and click on OK to confirm.
Note: The PCR cannot be carried by a VBI component.

Chapter 4 269
The second VBI page is the following:
Figure 4.76: VBI Lines
The VBI lines area consists of the following fields:

Line types Choice between B Teletext, Ceefax B (Magazine), B
Subtitles only, Information VPS, WSS and
Transparent Line.
Lines to be transmitted Selection of frame blanking lines which contain the
transmitted VBI data.
The first box concerns blanking lines in the first field,
whereas the second box concerns blanking lines in the
second field.
Operating procedure: first select the type (line types), then
click on the lines that are to be transmitted.
4. Edit the parameters and click on OK to confirm.

270 Chapter 4
Notes concerning BARCO data:

1. When creating a VBI component for transmitting Monochrome BARCO data, the
transparent lines should not contain any other VBI data, otherwise the lines will not be
coded and an alarm will be raised. There are no BARCO specific VBI components and MT
Transparent should be selected as the VBI line type.
2. The Stream type of the MT Transparent VBI components should be 0x92 which corre-
sponds to a BARCO proprietary value. The Stream type of the MT Transparent VBI
components (ISO or BARCO) can be selected using the Telnet application. Refer to the
section VBI stream type page 398.
3. A Data broadcast id descriptor with a value of 0x0103 (enter this value as the Data
broadcast id) should be added to the PMT at the VBI component level. Refer to the section:
PMT descriptors page 283.
0x0103
data broadcast id
Leave emptyu

Chapter 4 271
4.5.4.1.4 - Editing parameters of the data component
, Procedure
1. Select the private data component.
specific commands.
Edit parameters...
Remove component...

A dialogue box is displayed allowing parameters relating to the private data
component to be entered. This dialogue box has two panels:
• The first panel defines the general parameters of the private data component. It
is independent of the data-injection interface.
• The second panel depends on the injection interface (Ethernet, Serial or TS).
First panel: General Parameters
Figure 4.77: Entry of private data component (general parameters/Ethernet

interface)

272 Chapter 4
Figure 4.78: Entry of private data component (general parameters/TS interface)
The Source area has the following field:

Source Identification of input interface type, Ethernet, Serial
Input (if N41SD56K - Data Injection through RS 232
option present) or TS Input (if N41STSIN - ASI TS
Input option present).
The Multiplex format area has the following fields:

Output PID Identification of TS packets which transport the
component.
Note: For two distinct components, it is not tested that

the outgoing PID are different. The PID are considered
in the incoming stream. If the two components exists,
one of the components are stopped and an alarm is
raised.

Chapter 4 273
Contains the PCR This field allows the program clock reference to be
inserted in the TS packet headers transporting the
component.
The PCR cannot be carried by a serial component.
The Bitrate area has the following fields:

Min. bitrate Min. bitrate is not used for the serial components. For
the Ethernet interface, if the min. bitrate is exceeded,
an alarm is raised.
Max. bitrate - This field is used for regulation in the case of an
Ethernet source.
- For the serial interface, an alarm is generated and
stops the component.
The Bitrate area has the following fields (for the TS interface):
Stop the component if its bitrate is upper than...
Stopping instructions can be made on an incoming
component associated to a local service.
Raise an alarm if its bitrate is lower than
An alarm is raised if the measured bitrate is lower than
the instruction. If the field is empty, there will be no
alarm.
The Signalisation area has the following field:

Stream type Identification of data type, conforming to MPEG2
standard ISO 13818-1: “Generic Coding of Moving
Pictures and Associated Audio: Systems”.

274 Chapter 4
Second panel: Parameters specific to each injection interface

1. For the serial interface
Figure 4.79: Entry of data component (Serial interface parameters)
The Parameters area has the following field:

Baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400.

Chapter 4 275
2. For the Ethernet interface
Figure 4.80: Entry of data component (Ethernet interface parameters)
The Ethernet parameters area contains the following fields:

Channel id If the data is input via the Ethernet interface, each data
flow must be referenced by a unique channel number
in the encoder. This number is recalled on each input.
Protocol The proposed protocols are TBS, VIACCESS, UDP
DVB Simulcrypt and TCP DVB Simulcrypt.

276 Chapter 4
TBS protocol
The injection of data via the TCP/IP sockets uses a NEXTREAM control/command
proprietary protocol. For this protocol there are no specific parameters.
Figure 4.81: Ethernet interface, TBS protocol parameters

Chapter 4 277
VIACCESS protocol
The injection of data via the TCP/IP sockets uses VIACCESS protocol. This mode
is used for the broadcast of VIACCESS EMM. For this protocol there are no
specific parameters.
Figure 4.82: Ethernet interface, VIACCESS protocol parameters

278 Chapter 4
UDP DVB Simulcrypt protocol

Data is transmitted via UDP/IP according to a protocol defined by DVB.
Figure 4.83: Ethernet interface, UDP DVB Simulcrypt protocol parameters
For UDP DVB Simulcrypt, the following parameters must be defined:

Service_port Read only. This field gives the port number on which
the device receives data to inject. This value can be
edited from the device’s advanced parameters (Data
injection page). If changed a device reboot is
necessary.
Data_port Number of the IP port on which the device is listening.
Client_id Identification of the source device. This value must be
identical to the one used on the injection side.
Data_id, Stream_id This identification is for distinguishing different
private components coming from the same injector.
This value must be identical to the one used on the
source side.
This field is called Data id in version 2 of the standard
and Stream id in its first version.

Chapter 4 279
TCP DVB Simulcrypt protocol
Figure 4.84: Ethernet interface, TCP DVB Simulcrypt protocol parameters

280 Chapter 4
For the TCP DVB Simulcrypt protocol the parameters are:
Service port Read only. This field gives the port number on which
the device receives data to inject. This value can be
edited from the device’s advanced parameters (Data
injection page). If changed a device reboot is
necessary.
Client id Identifier set on the DVB injector. In the case of an

EMM channel, this identifier must take the
SuperCAS_id parameter value supplied by the CAS
(for SuperCAS_id definitions, see the standard ETSI
TS 103 197 DVB: Head-end implementation of DVB
SimulCrypt).
Default value: 0
Data id, Stream_id This field is called Data id in version 2 of the standard
and Stream id in its first version.
Default value: 0
3. For the TS interface
Figure 4.85: Entry of data component (TS input interface parameters)

Chapter 4 281
The Component selection area is used for setting the injection parameters TS input
and Input PID.
Note: The incident PID is replaced by the one supplied by the Operating Station (see
Figure 4.77 page 271).
The Incoming signalling area is used for programming the behaviour of the
encoder with regard to incoming signalling.
• If Dropped is selected, this means that the stream-
type information and the descriptors contained in the
PMT and the SDT input tables of the incoming TS
stream are not kept. The Stream_type value of the first
tab ("General") is taken into account and the Edit
additional PMT info... and Edit additional SDT info...
commands are used for adding new descriptors.
• If Added to the local signalling is selected, this
means that the stream-type information and the
descriptors contained in the PMT and the SDT input
tables are kept and added to the descriptors edited
locally. The Stream_type value of the first tab
("General") is not used.
Note: If a transiting service component is linked to a generated service via the "local"
option for descriptor insertion, the list of descriptors mentioned will be associated with the
component in both PMTs generated by the multiplexer (the descriptors associated with the
component in the PMT of the original service are forgotten). In other words, the multi-
plexer only generates one context per component, and the transiting component is assi-
gned the modifications made when it is used as a linked component.

282 Chapter 4
The components thus redefined are displayed in the main window:
Figure 4.86: Main window
Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on
the button to cancel the changes).

Chapter 4 283
4.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors
The command for editing PMT (Programme Map Table) descriptors is used to
associate descriptors with services or components. Descriptors must be added in
compliance with the DVB standard set out in the reference document ETS 300 468
“Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)
systems”.
• PMT descriptors for a service
, Procedure for editing PMT descriptors
1. Select the relevant service.
2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific
commands.
Edit parameters...
Remove service...
Edit additional SDT info...
Add components...
3. Choose the Edit additional PMT info... command.

Following this operation, a dialogue box will be displayed to add or remove
descriptors and display or edit related parameters.
Figure 4.87: Editing PMT descriptors

284 Chapter 4
An identifier under 128 can be entered in the descriptor adding screen to enable
insertion of any DVB or ISO descriptor which does not appear in the default list.
If the identifier entered does not match a supported descriptor the descriptor editing
screen is displayed for hexadecimal input of the descriptor.
Figure 4.88: Adding a private descriptor

Chapter 4 285
, Procedure for adding a descriptor

1. Click on Add...
A dialogue box is then displayed to select the required descriptor type.
Figure 4.89: Add a descriptor
The drop-down list in the Standard option offers a choice between several
descriptor types: audio_stream, copyright, data_broadcast_id,
data_stream_alignment, hierarchy, IBP, language, maximum_bitrate, mosaic,
multiplex_buffer_utilization, private_data_indicator, private_data_specifier,
registration, service_move, smoothing_buffer, STD, stream_identifier, subtitling,
system_clock, target_background_grid, teletext, video_stream and video_window.
Note:
It is possible to enter the three characters of the ISO 639 language codes for any language
that is not available in the list.
2. Select the required descriptor.

3. Click on OK.
Clicking on OK updates the selected descriptor type in the original dialogue box.

286 Chapter 4
4. Fill in the parameters then click on Add in the right-hand panel.
Figure 4.90: Display of descriptor type with related parameters

(example: language descriptor)
5. Click on OK.

Chapter 4 287
Data_broadcast_id descriptor
Figure 4.91: Data_broadcast_id descriptor
Data broadcast id This parameter identifies the data type transported by

the component. Its value is between 0 and 65535 or can
be selected from a list of preset values. The exhaustive
list is available in the DVB ETR 162 standard.
The default value is Asynchronous data stream.
The preset values available are:
Text Value
Data pipe 0x0001
Asynchronous data stream 0x0002
Synchronous data stream 0x0003
Synchronised data stream 0x0004
Multi protocol encapsulation 0x0005
Data Carousel 0x0006
Object Carousel 0x0007
DVB ATM streams 0x0008

288 Chapter 4
ID selector bytes The definition and the value of this byte field depend
on the selected data broadcast id.
Default value: blank
Maximum number of bytes: 253 bytes.
, Procedure for deleting a descriptor

1. Select the descriptor to be removed (the descriptor is displayed with a blue
background).
2. Click on Remove.
3. Confirm your choice ("Yes") in the dialogue box displayed.
, Procedure for editing/displaying descriptor parameters

1. Select the descriptor to be edited/displayed (the descriptor is displayed with a
blue background).
2. If required, edit the parameters in the Parameters area.
3. Click on OK.
• PMT descriptors for a component

, Procedure for editing PMT descriptors for a component
1. Select the relevant component.
specific commands.
Edit parameters...
Remove component...
3. Choose the Edit additional PMT info... command.

Chapter 4 289
Following this command, a dialogue box appears identical to that in Figure 4.87
page 283. However, the descriptors listed relate to the selected component.
It is possible to add and remove descriptors and edit their parameters as described
above.
4.5.4.1.6 - SDT descriptors
The command for editing SDT (Service Description Table) descriptors is used to
associate descriptors with services: bouquet_name, country_availability,
data_broadcast, linkage, ML_service_name, mosaic, NVOD_reference,
private_data_specifier, stuffing, telephone and time_shifted_service. Descriptors
must be added in compliance with the DVB standard set out in the reference
document ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital Video
Broadcasting (DVB) systems".
The procedures are similar to those described for the PMT descriptors (see section
4.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors page 283).

290 Chapter 4
4.5.4.2 - Advanced Functions
4.5.4.2.1 - Shared components
A shared component is a component which is linked to two or more services in the

SI/PSI tables.
Actually data of a shared component are not duplicated. The elementary stream is
just indicated by the signalling of different services.
A typical application of shared components is a live information service. For
instance this service could be a news service that displays stock exchange quotes on
the TV set in real time. To be accessible from every service these data must be
broadcast into each TS of the network and referenced by each service. There are
three methods of implementation:
Signalling Signalling Signalling
Srv 1 Srv 2 Srv 3 Srv 1 Srv 2 Srv 3 Srv 1 Srv 2 Srv 3

PID 100 PID 101 PID 102 PID 100 PID 100 PID 100
E. Stream E. Stream E. Stream
PID 100 PID 100 PID 100

PID 101
PID 102
(a) (b) (c)
Figure 4.92: Principle of Shared Components
In the first solution (case a), the elementary stream is duplicated for each service in
the TS and is referenced as a private data component. The cost of this solution in
terms of bandwidth is very high.
The second way (case b) is to broadcast the elementary stream (ES) once in the TS.
A private descriptor is used to reference the component. The decoder is able to
interpret that descriptor and tune to the component. This solution is acceptable but
not compatible with any remultiplexing operation since the component is not
described in the SI/PSI signalling.

Chapter 4 291
The last solution (case c) is to use the share component feature. The data are
broadcast once and the component is described in SI/PSI signalling.
Any type of component can be shared.
, Procedure
1. Select a service.
2. Select the Add components... command.
3. Consult the list of components.
4. Check the Show shared components box to display all the proposed resources
(including those already used in another service).
5. Select the components to share in the list.
6. Click on OK.
Shared components are displayed like the other components in the main window.
This means they can appear several times in the tree view.
Notes:
1. When parameters of a shared component are changed, all the items of the list referring
to the shared component are updated. This means that each parameter of a shared
component is identical regardless of the service except for the PCR. This parameter can
have different values according to the generated service that uses it. When a shared
component is removed from a service, it is not removed from other services. Actually only
the reference to this service is deleted. But when a shared component is only referenced by
one service, it automatically becomes a non shared component. The remove command
works exactly as it does for a non shared component.
2. A shared component can only be scrambled locally if all the transmitted instances of this
component belong to the same access group. Thus, when a component belongs to two
services and scrambling is only required for one of the services, then the component is
transmitted in clear.
4.5.4.2.2 - Ghost components
Ghost components are components broadcast by an encoder that are not referenced
in SI or PSI tables. To recover a ghost component the receiver must know its PID.
Since the PID is not present in SI/PSI signalling, the receiver and the transmitter
must have a non standard mechanism to exchange the PID. This could be a private

292 Chapter 4
data descriptor or a private table. Ghost components are used by some networks for
testing purposes or to generate non DVB/ISO streams.
Notes:
1. Ghost components cannot automatically be transmitted at the remultiplexing stage even
if the multiplexer is set to pass all services. They must be explicitly indicated to get
through the multiplexer.
2. Ghost components cannot carry the PCR.
3. If a component is a ghost component (non indicated in the outgoing stream), It does not
be associated to a service. If a component is declared "ghost component" issued of a SRV1
service on the tributary, and the broadcast of the service SRV1 is authorised without
stopping the component, the component is neither a ghost component because it describes
in the PMT of the service SRV1.
To avoid confusion for users who do not need this feature, the Ghost component
item is hidden by default. To show this item and gain access to the ghost component
facilities, select the Manage ghost components command in the pop-up menu of
the Generated Services item.
Figure 4.93: Add ghost components
, Procedure
1. Select the Manage ghost components command in the menu attached to the
Generated Services item.
The icon appears in the tree structure. All the ghost components will be
grouped under this entity.
2. Right mouse click to display the shortcut menu associated with the icon.
Add components...

Chapter 4 293
3. Select the Add components... command.

4. Select components as for a standard service. Only free components can be
selected. Ghost components cannot be shared.
Figure 4.94: Example of ghost component
4.5.4.2.3 - Inband command
This command is not useful for this encoder type.
4.5.5 - TS input
The encoder TS input is only visible and can only be configured using the
N41STSIN option.
The TS input is found under Tributaries in the {Technical Configuration}

application window.
The filtering functions on this input are the same as those offered on a multiplexer.
They are summarised in the diagram on the next page.

294 Chapter 4
BLANK PAGE

Chapter 4 295
Tributary
TRIBUTARY level selection
used unused
Edit filtering
Signalling type
Alarm if bitrate >...
Alarm if the bitrate <...
Reallocation authorisation
Service Pass/Stop all EMM service

selection ECM selection
SERVICE level
Stop all EMM
Pass/Stop all If (Stop all EMM)
EMM
Pass all EMM
If (Pass all EMM)
all SERVICES Stop all Pass/Stop all
If (Stop all services)
services
If (Pass all services) Pass all
some SERVICES Remove Edit Filtering Authorise a Authorise a Drop an Authorise an EMM Remove
Drop a service
service to be service to be EMM service EMM service Edit filtering
transmitted transmitted
EMM _PID : Input PID:

Input service_id: Input service_id: Input service_id:
Change PID:
Change service_id:
Stop if bitrate >...
Change service_type:
Change service_name:
Stop if bitrate >...
EMM SERVICES
COMPONENT level
Stop all
Pass/Stop all
all COMPONENTS components
Pass all
Authorize a Add a
some COMPONENTS Drop a component
component component
Input PID:
Change PID: Input PID:
Stop if bitrate >... STANDARD SERVICES
TS Input filtering: menu tree

296 Chapter 4
BLANK PAGE

Chapter 4 297
All types of filtering are possible:

• First level filtering: first level filtering provides global action on the TS input.
The Unused command stops the TS input whilst the Used command lets the TS
input stream through, applying the second, third and fourth level filtering conditions
defined below.
• Second level filtering: global filtering conditions may be defined (Stop all or Pass
all) on each of the following three entities: services, EMM data, access control data.
For both the Services and EMM data entities, additional filters can be used to
authorise or drop individual services and EMM flows: Authorise a service to be
transmitted or Drop a service and Authorise an EMM service or Drop an EMM
service commands.
Other facilities are also offered, e.g.
• checking incident TS stream identity (not implemented),
• selecting incident table processing mode,
• authorising automatic reallocation of component PIDs in the event of
conflict,
• monitoring the TS input bitrate. Monitoring allows the TS input to be
stopped if bitrate is exceeded with notification to the operator.
• Third level filtering: the identification parameters for authorised services
(service_id, service_type, service_name) and authorised EMM flows (EMM_PID)
can be redefined. In addition, service components are filtered at this level; filtering
may be global (Stop all or Pass all), or specific (Add a component or Drop a
component).
Other facilities are also proposed, e.g.
• suspending or starting up transmission of a transit service,
• attaching locally generated components to a transit service,
• monitoring bitrates for incoming services. Monitoring allows incident
services to be stopped if bitrate is exceeded with notification to the operator.
• Fourth level filtering: all functions affecting components are grouped at this
level, i.e.:
• redefining a component PID.
• suspending or starting up transmission of a transit component,
• monitoring bitrates for incoming components. Monitoring allows incident
components to be stopped if bitrate is exceeded with notification to the
operator.

298 Chapter 4
4.5.5.1 - First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input

, Procedure to stop or pass the input TS
1. In the main window, select the tributary (TS);
2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific
commands:
Unused TS input
Used TS input
Edit filtering conditions...
Authorise a service to be transmitted...
(Drop a service...)
Authorise an EMM service...
(Drop an EMM service...)
3. Choose the Used command (or Unused as the case may be).
Note: with the Used command, the data contained in the input TS is found in the outgoing
multiplex, subject to the second, third and fourth level filtering conditions defined below.

selecting services and EMM flows
4.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributary
The commands linked to tributary filtering conditions are only available if the TS
input is not stopped (the Used command must be ticked in the shortcut menu
attached to the tributary).
, Procedure for editing the general filtering conditions on the tributary
1. In the main window, select the tributary;

Chapter 4 299
commands:
Unused TS input
Used TS input
Drop a service...
(Authorise an EMM service...)
Drop an EMM service...
3. Choose the Edit filtering conditions... command.
A dialogue box appears to input filtering conditions:
Figure 4.95: Editing of general filtering conditions for the tributary
Description of fields:
In the Transport stream checks area
Expected original network id and Expected TS id
Identity of the expected flow. If the input
flow does not match the expected identity,

300 Chapter 4
the encoder stops transmission.

Each TS is identified by a specific TS_id in
the original network which is in turn
identified by an original_network_id.
Not currently implemented.
Signalling Type The encoder load can be reduced by
requesting that only part of the incoming
signalling is managed. There are five
modes available:
No signalling: all signalling arriving on the
input is ignored. When this mode is
enabled, all filtering instructions are
ignored as there is no analysis of signalling.
Consequently, the filters placed on this
input are not implemented. Data received
on this input can only be used to define TS
components.
Default: the mode selected is the same as
that set for output (see editing of encoder
advanced parameters).
ISO signalling: Only ISO tables are
analysed. DVB tables are ignored (SDT and
EIT). If the multiplexer is configured to
generate a DVB output signal, the current
SDT is generated by default by the encoder
by automatic creation of service and service
provider names.
DVB restricted: ISO and DVB tables are
analysed except for EIT p/f and EIT s tables
which are still filtered. The current SDT
table is produced from the data elements
available in the current incoming SDT.
DVB signalling: ISO and DVB tables are
analysed. The SDT and EIT tables for each
service are retransmitted if the filtering
instructions authorise transmission of the
service.

Chapter 4 301
In the Default filtering modes area

Services Pass all: All incident TS services are
transmitted. However, unwanted services
can be removed one by one from the
outgoing multiplex using the Drop a
service... command in the shortcut menu
attached to the tributary (see section
4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services page 303).
Stop all: All incident TS services are
stopped. However, required services can be
added one by one to the outgoing multiplex
using the Authorise a service to be
transmitted... command in the shortcut
menu attached to the tributary (see section
4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services page 303).
EMMs Pass all: All EMM flows from the incident
TS are transmitted. However, unwanted
EMM flows can be removed one by one
from the outgoing multiplex using the Drop
an EMM service... command in the
shortcut menu attached to the tributary (see
section 4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows
page 306).
Stop all: All incident TS EMM flows are
stopped. However, required EMM flows
can be added one by one to the outgoing
multiplex using the Authorise an EMM
service... command in the shortcut menu
attached to the tributary (see section
4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows page
306).
ECMs Filtering is applied to all data linked to
access control on the relevant TS input, i.e.:
• PIDs containing ECM channels;
• CA_descriptors placed in the service
PMTs.
Pass all: all data linked to access control is
transmitted.
Stop all: all data linked to access control is
stopped.

302 Chapter 4
If the signal is scrambled, only the ECMs

and their references in the signalling are
removed.
In the Case of PID conflict area

PID reallocation authorised If a transit component PID comes into
conflict with a locally generated service
PID, the encoder reallocates another
available PID value.
PID reallocation not authorised If a transit component PID comes into
conflict with a locally generated service
PID, the encoder stops the component and
raises an alarm to the operating terminal.
Notes:
1. Generated components have priority over transiting components. So, when generating a
component whose PID enters into conflict with that of a transiting component, the latter is
stopped (if reallocation is barred on the tributary) or its PID is reallocated.
A transiting component linked to a locally generated service is not considered as a gene-
rated component.
2. It is advisable not to change the authorised/not authorised reallocation mode during
normal operation and to always keep the same mode. In PID reallocation authorised
mode, the way in which PIDs are reallocated is directly linked to the order in which they
are detected in the incoming stream. It is therefore not surprising that reallocation can
differ between a redundant device and its back up device.
3. The device accepts both services with a PCR carried by a specific PID and reallocation
of the supported PID as required; however, one case of reallocation has not been solved.
take the following example:
S1 (Vid = 200, Aud = 201, PCR = 400),
S2 (Vid = 300, Aud = 301, PCR = 400),
S3 (Vid = 400, Aud = 401, PCR = 400).
If no specific reallocation instruction is given, the output signal will be correct. But if
video 400 to video 500 reallocation is required, the output signal will be as follows:
S1 (Vid = 200, Aud = 201, PCR = 400),
S2 (Vid = 300, Aud = 301, PCR = 400),
S3 (Vid = 500, Aud = 401, PCR = 500).
In fact the result depends on the arrival and processing order of the PMTs. The problem
does not arise if the PCR is not carried by a component.

Chapter 4 303
In the Bitrate monitoring area

Drop this input if bitrate exceeds Maximum authorised bitrate threshold. If
exceeded, the input is dropped.
and raise an alarm if bitrate is lower than:
An alarm is raised if the bitrate is under the
specified value.

4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services
Selection of transit services depends on the tributary filtering conditions defined in

the previous section.
If the (Default filtering modes) Services Pass all radio button is enabled, all input
TS services are found in the outgoing multiplex. However, unwanted services can
be removed one by one.
, Procedure for removing services belonging to the input TS from the end
multiplex
commands:
Unused TS input
Used TS input
Drop a service...
3. Choose the Drop a service... command.
A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the service to be removed.

304 Chapter 4
Figure 4.96: Selection of the service to be removed
4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box.

Figure 4.97: Main window - Removing a service
Conversely, if the (Default filtering modes) Services Stop all radio button is
enabled, no input TS service is found in the outgoing multiplex. However, required
services may be added one by one.
, Procedure for adding services belonging to the input TS to the outgoing
multiplex

Chapter 4 305
commands:
Unused TS input
Used TS input
(Drop a service...)
3. Choose the Authorise a service to be transmitted... command.
A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the service to be added.
Figure 4.98: Selection of the service to be added
Note: In the Bitrate supervision area, when the case Stop the service if its bitrate upper
than is selected, the complete service is not stopped. Only some components are barred
until the desired value of the bitrate reached.

306 Chapter 4
Figure 4.99: Main window - Adding a service
4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows
As with services, selection of transit EMM flows depends on the tributary filtering
conditions defined in section 4.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributary
page 298.
If the (Default filtering modes) EMMs Pass all radio button is enabled, all the input
TS EMM flows are found in the outgoing multiplex. However, unwanted EMM
flows can be removed one by one.
, Procedure for removing EMM flows belonging to the input TS from the
outgoing multiplex
commands:
Unused TS input
Used TS input
(Drop a service...)

Chapter 4 307
3. Choose the Drop an EMM service... command.

A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the EMM service to be removed.
Figure 4.100: Selection of the EMM service to be removed

Figure 4.101: Main window - Removing an EMM service

308 Chapter 4
Conversely, if the (Default filtering modes) EMMs Stop all radio button is enabled,
no input TS EMM flow is found in the outgoing multiplex. However, required
EMM flows can be added one by one.
, Procedure for adding EMM flows belonging to the input TS to the outgoing
multiplex
commands:
Unused TS input
Used TS input
(Drop a service...)
3. Choose the Authorise an EMM service... command.
A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the EMM service to be added.
Figure 4.102: Selection of the EMM service to be added


Chapter 4 309
Figure 4.103: Main window - Adding an EMM service
4.5.5.3 - Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services
4.5.5.3.1 - General filtering conditions
These conditions only apply to services added individually using the Authorise a
service to be transmitted... command. They are used for:
• suspending or restarting transmission of the service,
• global filtering of all service components (Stop all components or Pass all
components),
• changing service identification parameters (useful when forming a new
multiplex or when there is a service conflict during remultiplexing),
• checking that bitrate is not exceeded for the incident service,
• attaching local private data to an input TS service during the
remultiplexing operation.
, Procedure for editing general filtering conditions for a service

1. In the main window, select the relevant service;

310 Chapter 4
commands:
Edit filtering parameters...
Remove this condition...
(Authorise a component to be transmitted...)
Drop a component...
Add components...
3. Choose the Edit filtering parameters... command.
A dialogue box appears for input of filtering conditions.
Figure 4.104: Editing of general filtering conditions for a service
The Service selection area consists of the following fields:
Input service id Service identification,
Browse Command displaying the list of services
present in the input TS flow,

Chapter 4 311
On air / Off air / Stopped Command starting or suspending

transmission of the service. When
transmission is suspended (Off air
selected), the Off air message appears in
the application’s main window opposite the
service concerned.
The Default component filtering mode area consists of the following fields:
Pass all components All service components are transmitted.
However, unwanted components can be
removed one by one from the outgoing
multiplex using the Drop a component
command in the shortcut menu attached to
the service (see section 4.5.5.3.2 -
Individual filtering of components).
Stop all components All service components are stopped.
However, required components can be
added one by one to the outgoing multiplex
using the Authorise a component to be
transmitted command in the shortcut menu
attached to the service (see section 4.5.5.3.2
- Individual filtering of components).
The Modifications in output TS area consists of the following fields:

Change service id Number of the service in the outgoing
multiplex,
Change service type Type of service in the outgoing multiplex.
Change service name Name of the service in the outgoing
multiplex.
The Bitrate supervision area consists of the following fields:

Stop the service if its bitrate higher than
Maximum authorised bitrate threshold.
When this is exceeded, the service is
stopped.

312 Chapter 4

specified value.

4.5.5.3.2 - Individual filtering of components
Selection of transit services depends on the service filtering conditions defined in

the previous section.
If the (Default component filtering mode) Pass all components radio button is
enabled, all components of the service concerned are found in the outgoing
multiplex. However, unwanted components can be removed one by one.
, Procedure for removing components belonging to an input TS service from the
outgoing multiplex
commands:
Drop a component...
Add components...
3. Choose the Drop a component... command.
A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the component to be removed.

Chapter 4 313
Figure 4.105: Selection of the component to be removed

Figure 4.106: Main window - Removing a component
Conversely, if the (Default component filtering mode) Stop all components radio
button is enabled, no component of the service concerned is found in the outgoing
multiplex. However, required components can be added one by one.
, Procedure for adding components belonging to the input TS to the outgoing
multiplex

314 Chapter 4
commands:
Authorise a component to be transmitted...
(Drop a component...)
Add components...
3. Choose the Authorise a component to be transmitted... command.
A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the component to be added.
Figure 4.107: Selection of the component to be added


Chapter 4 315
Figure 4.108: Main window - Adding a component

316 Chapter 4
4.5.5.3.3 - Attaching components
It is possible to add local private data components to an input TS service during the
remultiplexing operation. The following example shows how to configure the
encoder for using attached components.
In the example, the encoder is to transmit all the services coming from tributary 1
and add to the input TS service 500 a private data component, the PID of which is
774.
Figure 4.109: Attached components
The attached components are private data that can be input by either the Ethernet
link or the serial link.
Note: The attached components cannot carry PCR.

Chapter 4 317
, Procedure
1. In the main window, select the relevant service.
Note: For tributaries with the default mode Pass all components, define a positive service
filter in Authorise a service to be transmitted... to specify the service.
Figure 4.110: Positive service filter "Authorise a service..."

318 Chapter 4
Figure 4.111: "Authorise a service..." dialogue box
commands:
Add components...
3. Choose the Add components... command to attach the component.

Chapter 4 319
Figure 4.112: Add components... command
A dialogue box is displayed for you to select the component to be added.

320 Chapter 4
Figure 4.113: Add components... dialogue box

Figure 4.114: Main window - attached component

Chapter 4 321
Figure 4.115: Dialogue box, edition of parameters
Notes:
1. The device does not know how to change the PID PMT in the PMT table of the transi-
ting service. Thus, the Contains the PCR is greyed out.
2. When a scrambled component is attached to a service (TS service or generated service),
only the CA_descriptor corresponding to the component can be recovered. Component
scrambling must therefore be performed at component level and not service level.
4.5.5.3.4 - Removing a service
, Procedure
commands:
Add components...

322 Chapter 4
3. Choose the Remove this condition... command.

A message appears to confirm removal of the service.
4. Click on OK or Cancel.
4.5.5.4 - Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components
4.5.5.4.1 - General filtering conditions
These conditions only apply to components added individually to the outgoing

multiplex via the Authorise a component to be transmitted... command. They are
used for:
• changing component identification parameters (useful when forming a
new multiplex or when there is a PID conflict during remultiplexing),
• suspending or restarting component transmission,
• checking that the bitrate is not exceeded for the incident component.
, Procedure for editing general filtering conditions for a component

1. In the main window, select the component;
specific commands:
3. Choose the Edit filtering parameters... command.

Chapter 4 323
A dialogue box appears to input filtering conditions.
Figure 4.117: Editing of general filtering conditions for a component
In the Selection area
Input component PID Identification of the component,
Browse Command displaying the list of
components present in the service,
Off air Command suspending transmission of the
component. When transmission is
suspended (button enabled), the Off air
message appears in the application’s main
window opposite the component
concerned.
In the Multiplexing area

Change PID PID in the outgoing multiplex.

324 Chapter 4
In the Bitrate supervision area

Stop the component if its bitrate is higher than
Maximum authorised bitrate threshold. If
this is exceeded, the component is stopped.
specified value.

4.5.5.4.2 - Removing a component
, Procedure
1. In the main window, select the component;
specific commands:.
Edit filtering parameters
3. Choose the Remove this condition... command.
A message appears to confirm removal of the component.
4. Click on OK or Cancel.

Chapter 4 325

326 Chapter 4
4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application
4.6 - {MONITORING & REDUNDANCY} APPLICATION
Foreword:
• Before starting the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application, it is recom-
mended to activate the {Equipment Interface} application (servex.exe), see
note in section 4.3 - page 170. It is recommended to activate this application
before using any other operating software applications.
• To modify parameters in the application, do not forget to lock the terminal for
the current application ( ). The commands are then accessible. The main
window background is white.
French or English (see section 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language page 160).
The {Monitoring & Redundancy} application allows supervision of the rate of

services and their components and also transmits encoder alarms.
Maintenance commands are also available to reboot a device, display device
information (general and internal information) and upgrade its configuration.
Note: The redundancy function, as suggested in the application name, does not concern the
"Stand-Alone" environment.

Chapter 4 327
The following sections present the screen layout and the different functions offered
by the application.

section 4.6.3 Alarm supervision
section 4.6.4 Supervision of services and data flow
section 4.6.5 Save all/Load all commands
section 4.6.6 Maintenance commands
section 4.6.7 Audible warning of alarms
Equipment window Redundancy report window Alarms window Services and data flow window
Figure 4.119: Screen

328 Chapter 4
• Menu bar

Refresh Reserved.
View Alarms Display the Alarms window.
Automatic Not applicable in "Stand-Alone" context.
redundancy report
Services and data Display the Services and data flow window.
flow
Hierarchical view Display the Equipment window in Hierarchical
view format.
Physical view Not applicable in "Stand-Alone" context.
Tool Lock all Lock the operating station to enable device
parameters to be edited. See section 4.1.6 - Device
locking/unlocking for details.
Unlock all Unlock the operating station. See 4.1.6 - Device
locking/unlocking for details.
Save all... Save all configurations including any comment to
file.
Load all... Restore a full configuration previously saved by
Save all...
Options Sound... Enable/disable the terminal audible warning
signal.
Window Cascade Choice of window arrangement.
Tile vertical
Tile horizontal
Arrange icons
Close all views
Help About... Display software version.
Operating manual... Open on-line user manual. See 4.1.4 - On-line
manuals page 162 for details.
Alarm help Open {Alarm Help} application.

Chapter 4 329
• Tool bar
Button Comment
Cancel the modifications and revert to the last saved configuration (i.e. the
active configuration).
Display the Alarms window.
Display the Automatic redundancy report.
Display the Services and data flow window.
Display the Equipment window in Hierarchical view format.
Display the Equipment window in Sites or Racks view format. Not applicable
in "Stand-Alone" context.
Lock the terminal for the current application. The commands are accessible.
The main window background is white.
Unlock the terminal for the current application. The commands are not acces-
sible (only consultation is possible). The main window background is grey.

330 Chapter 4
• Main window
To show information concerning alarms and service and rate supervision, the main
window can display up to three separate windows at the same time: the Alarms
window, the Equipment window and the Services and data flow window.
Alarms window
or Hierarchical view
Equipment window Sites view
Physical view (not
Racks view applicable
in
"Stand-Alone”
Automatic redundancy report window context)
Services and data flow window
Figure 4.120: Tree structure of windows and views
" Alarms window
This window is opened by clicking on the button or choosing the Alarms

command in the drop-down View menu on the menu bar.
It features three pages displayed by clicking on the corresponding Active, Released
and Masked tabs.
All the alarms sent by the encoder appear highlighted in yellow (plus one in blue).

Chapter 4 331
Major alarm Encoder name

Origin of fault
Minor alarm
Figure 4.121: Alarms window
The alarm highlighted in blue corresponds to the alarm to which the shortcut menus
apply. These menus are displayed with a right mouse click. A detailed explanation
of the alarm supervision function and the three Alarm pages can be found in section
4.6.3 - Alarm supervision page 334.
" Equipment window
This window shows the encoder supervised by the operating station, with three
mutually exclusive views.
a) Hierarchical view: This view may be accessed by clicking on the button or
choosing the Hierarchical view command in the drop-down View menu on the
menu bar.
The icon symbolising the equipment is displayed in a different way depending on
the equipment alarm status:
• grey icon: correct operation (no alarm).
• flashing red icon: alarm activated.
• non-flashing red icon: alarm released by Operator.
A menu is also associated with the device, providing the following commands:
• the following maintenance commands: encoder reboot, consultation of device
information (general and internal information) and configuration upgrade,

332 Chapter 4
• release of alarms or cancellation of release,

• lock or unlock the device (see section 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects for an explanation
of this function).
Note: Apart from the device information command which is always available, these
commands are only visible if the station is locked ( ).
Figure 4.122: Equipment - Hierarchical devices view
b) Sites view: This view may be accessed by clicking on the button or choosing
the Physical view command in the drop-down View menu on the menu bar. This
view shows the various sites or rooms supervised by the Operating Station. It is
only used in a "System" environment and is not proposed in "Stand-alone" mode. It
is not described in this manual.
c) Racks view: This view may be accessed from the Sites view. It is only used in a
"System" environment and is not proposed in "Stand-alone" mode. It is therefore
not described in more detail in this manual.

Chapter 4 333
" Services and data flow window
This window may be accessed by clicking on or choosing the Services and data
flow command in the drop-down View menu in the menu bar.
The window consists of two sub-windows. The first sub-window displays the input
services and rates on TS input. The second sub-window displays the output services
and bit rates supplied by the encoder. Component bitrates are measured every
second in the device. The bitrates fed back to the operating station appear fixed
whereas in reality they fluctuate.
Figure 4.123: "Services and data flow" window
The tree view has three levels:

• at level one, the encoder (in the "Input services..." subwindow) and the
Transport Stream conveying the set of services (in the "Output services..."
subwindow). It shows the maximum rate allowed depending on the output
frequency of the encoder and the size of the TS packets (see section 4.5.3.1.2 -
“Output” item page 194) as well as the current rate.
• at level two, the services of the selected device with data flow information. The
representation of services gives the name of the service, service identifier and
service data flow.
• at level three, the components of a service with data flow information. The
representation of components depends on their scrambling (the icon is greyed
out if the component is scrambled). Information given for components includes
component type (Video, Audio, etc.), PID (in decimal and hexadecimal) and
component data flow.

334 Chapter 4
4.6.3 - Alarm supervision
4.6.3.1 - Alarms window

The Alarms window contains three pages:
• active alarms (Active tab), alarms not treated by the operator,,
• released alarms (Released tab), alarms seen and treated by the operator,
• masked alarms (Masked tab), alarms seen but not treated by the operator.
Each tab text contains the number of alarms listed in each page in brackets.
When a device is selected in the hierarchical view, all alarms related to the device in
the Alarms window are coloured yellow except the first in the list which takes the
selection colour.
" Active page
This page displays the active alarms of all devices.

An active alarm is represented by:
• an icon which specifies the alarm severity level (minor, major),
• the alarm type identifier,
• the device which triggered the alarm,
• the textual description of the alarm.
A shortcut menu is attached to this page for the selected alarm to trigger it in
released or masked status.
Figure 4.124: Active alarms page

Chapter 4 335
Description of shortcut commands associated with an active alarm
Release This command releases an alarm. The alarm is deleted

from the list of active alarms and added to the list of
released alarms. When the alarm falls, it is removed
from the list. When it next rises, it becomes active
again.
Release all active alarms This command releases all active alarms. See the
Release command.
Mask This command masks the selected alarm for the device
concerned. The alarm is no longer used when assessing
the status of the device. The {Event Log} application
however continues to manage the masked alarm (i.e.
monitor its fall). When the command is run, the alarm
is moved from the list of active alarms to the list of
masked alarms.
Mask for all devices This command masks the selected alarm for all
devices. The alarm is no longer used when assessing
the status of the devices. The selected alarm is
identified by (AlarmId and AlarmIdExtension). The
alarms concerned are all deleted from the list of active
alarms and added to the list of masked alarms.

336 Chapter 4
" Released page
This page lists the alarms released by the Operator.

A released alarm is an alarm present on a device which the Operator has seen and
dealt with. As long as the alarm does not fall, it continues to be displayed on this
page.
Figure 4.125: Released alarms page
Description of shortcut commands associated with a released alarm
Reactivate This command reactivates a selected released alarm.

The alarm is deleted from the list of released alarms
and added to the list of active alarms.
Reactivate all released alarms

This command reactivates all released alarms.
Mask the selected alarm See Description of shortcut commands associated with
an active alarm page 335.
Mask the selected alarm for all devices

See Description of shortcut commands associated with
an active alarm page 335.

Chapter 4 337
" Masked page
Masked alarms are represented by:

• an icon which specifies the alarm severity level (minor, major);
• the alarm type identifier;
• the name of the device which triggered the alarm or All devices showing that the
alarm is masked for all devices which generate it;
• a complete description of the alarm.
A shortcut menu is attached to the page for the selected alarm.
Figure 4.126: Masked alarms page
Description of shortcut commands associated with a masked alarm
Unmask This command unmasks a selected alarm. This alarm is

deleted from the list of masked alarms.
Unmask all alarms This command unmasks all masked alarms in one
command.

338 Chapter 4
4.6.3.2 - Equipment window

The Equipment window can be used to release all alarms or reactivate all released
alarms for a device in one mouse click.
, Procedure to release all alarms for the device

1. Select the device in the Equipment window (Hierarchical view).
commands.
(...)
Maintenance commands...
Release alarms
Activate any released alarm
Lock device
(...)
3. Choose the Release alarms command.

This has the following effects:
• The audible warning on the operating station is silenced,
• All alarm signals from the device are saved in the alarms list,
• In the Equipment window, the icon representing the device in alarm condition
remains red, but does not flash.
, Procedure to reactivate all alarms
commands.
(...)
Release alarms
Lock device
(...)

Chapter 4 339
3. Choose the Activate any released alarm command.

If the device is still faulty, the alarm signals are reactivated (audible alarm
reactivation and flashing icon). If the device is no longer faulty, the alarms
disappear from the alarms list.

340 Chapter 4
4.6.4 - Supervision of services and data flow
, Procedure to view the services and components at the encoder input (tributary)
1. Display the Services and data flow window.
commands.
View input services and data flow...

View output services and data flow...
Monitor stuffing bitrate...
Drop all same level items
Collapse all same level items
Note: The Monitor stuffing bitrate..., Drop all same level items and Collapse all same
level items commands are irrelevant for the DBE 4110 encoder.
3. Choose the View input services and data flow... command.

A dialogue box allowing the tributary (TS) to be selected is displayed.
Figure 4.127: Selection of the tributary to monitor
4. Select the TS and click on OK.

The services and components are displayed in the window (or in a second
sub-window if the first sub-window is already open for the output services and
components).

Chapter 4 341
Figure 4.128: Service and data flow (input only)
, Procedure to view the services and components sent from the encoder
1. Display the Services and data flow window.
commands.
View input services and data flow...

View output services and data flow...
Monitor stuffing bitrate...
Drop all same level items
Collapse all same level items
3. Choose the View output services and data flow... command.

342 Chapter 4
A dialogue box will be displayed for you to select the device from which the output
services are sent.
Figure 4.129: Selection of the device for displaying output services
Click on OK and the services and data flow will be displayed in the main window
(or in a second sub-window if the first sub-window is already open for the services
and input components).
Figure 4.130: Service and data flow (output only)
Note: The list is cut if the length is upper than seven pages.That can happen if the service
name is too long or if the number of services is very important. It is true for the incoming
services.

Chapter 4 343
Figure 4.131: Service and data flow (input and output)
4.6.5 - Save all/Load all commands
The Save all/load all commands allow to save a new configuration or recover a
configuration. The Save all command is available in the Tool menu in the
{Technical configuration} application.
Please refer to the note page 187.

344 Chapter 4
4.6.6 - Maintenance commands
The maintenance commands currently available concern device reboots,

consultation of device information (general and internal information) and
configuration upgrades.
Notes:
1. Maintenance commands are only available if the station is locked (with button or
shortcut Lock device command).
2. The following maintenance commands are reserved for use with a Channel
Controller: Upgrade all nominal devices configuration..., Save in PCMCIA card,
Off-line status, Maintenance status, Force configuration... and Load all
configuration for MCC... They are therefore not relevant to Stand-Alone mode.
, Procedure to reboot the device

commands:
(...)
Release alarms
Lock device
(...)
3. Choose the Maintenance commands... command.
Information...
Internal information...
Reboot device
Upgrade configuration...
(...)
(...)

Chapter 4 345
4. Choose the Reboot device command and confirm your choice in the dialogue box
displayed.
, Procedure to get device information

commands.
(...)
Release alarms
Lock device
(...)
Information...
Reboot device
(...)
(...)
4. Choose the Information... command. The dialogue box displayed contains three
tabs for displaying general information about the device, information about boards
and information about options in turn.

346 Chapter 4
Figure 4.132: Device information (1/3)
Figure 4.133: Device information 2/3

Chapter 4 347
Figure 4.134: Device information 3/3
, Procedure to get internal device information

commands.
(...)
Release alarms
Lock device
(...)

348 Chapter 4
Information...
Reboot device
(...)
(...)
4. Choose the Internal information... command.

The dialogue box displayed contains information on internal use of resources such
as the maximum number of sub-tables, the number of sub-tables used and the
number of free sub-tables. The same information is displayed for sections, packets,
ECM flows, etc.
Figure 4.135: Internal device information
, Procedure to upgrade configuration

This command is used to format version 6.5 configuration files as version 7.0 files
(current version). This operation is required to enable the next software upgrade
(version "7.0" to "7.1") without interrupting programmes, since a version 7.1 device
is capable of reading configurations edited in version 7.0 but not those edited with
version 6.5 (unless the upgrade operation described above has been performed).

Chapter 4 349

commands.
(...)
Release alarms
Lock device
(...)
Information...
Reboot device
(...)
(...)
4. Choose the Upgrade configuration... command. The following confirmation

request will be displayed:
5. Confirm the operation.

350 Chapter 4
4.6.7 - Audible warning of alarms
An audible warning is given by the operating station as soon as an alarm signal is

sent by the device.
To deactivate the audible warning, it is necessary to:
• remove the device fault, or
• release the alarm on the Operating Station, or
• disable the audible alarm using the Options/Sound command from the menu
bar in the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application.
Figure 4.137: Sound command in the menu bar

Chapter 4 351
4.7 - {Download} application
4.7 - {DOWNLOAD} APPLICATION
The {Download} application is used for firmware downloading allowing on-site

updating of boards.
The following sections display the screen layout and the different functions
available with the application.

section 4.7.3 Procedure
section 4.7.4 Additional commands
menu bar main window

tool bar
Figure 4.138: Download screen

352 Chapter 4
The functions are represented by the menu bar and the tool bar.
Menu bar.

File Open... Browse package or firmware.
Exit... Exit the application.
Download Start... Download firmware on selected device.
Stop... Stop downloading.
Help About Display software version.
Tool bar.
Button Comment
Browse package or firmware.
Add a device
Download firmware on selected device.
Stop downloading

Chapter 4 353
4.7.3 - Procedure
The procedure to follow is described below and divided into three parts:
1. Before downloading:
• Declare the device and establish a connection.
• Consult the "Information" window to find out the current version of the boards.
• Load the firmware to download. The files are provided on CD-ROM.
• Configure the download operation for the relevant device by selecting the
following tasks: downloading and/or memory bank toggling and/or device
reboot.
2. Downloading:
• Start downloading.
3. After downloading:
• Consult the downloading report.
4.7.3.1 - Before downloading

" Declare and connect device
• First method: In the tool bar,
Click on the button. A dialogue box will be displayed for you to enter the IP
address.
Figure 4.139: Add a device (1/2)
This function allows the encoder to be displayed in the main window as in Figure
4.140.

354 Chapter 4
• Second method: In the shortcut menu (first tab Devices),

commands.
New device...
Reach/Refresh...
Information
Configure download...
Start download...
Stop download...
Reboot...
Toggle boot space...
Log...
Delete...
2. Choose the New device... command to add the encoder in the main window.
3. The new device is displayed in the main window, as in the following figure:
Figure 4.140: Add a device (2/2)
" Get information about the device

This function provides information about the device’s identity, the boards it
contains and the installed options.
commands.

Chapter 4 355
3. Choose the Information... command. The dialogue box displayed contains three
tabs for displaying general information about the device, information about boards
and information about options in turn.
Figure 4.141: Information (1/3)

356 Chapter 4
" Select the firmware

1. Click on the second tab Firmware,
2. In the tool bar, click on the button.
3. Choose the package(s) or the firmware to download.
Note:
1. A package consists of several firmware.
2. The package(s) is (are) provided on CD-ROM.
3. For SSEB and AMuSE boards, the firmware files are identified by the following
extensions:
SSEB board .tes and .ssb,
AMuSE board: .amb and .fp1.

Chapter 4 357
The selected files are listed in the main window:
Figure 4.144: Firmware downloading
" Configure download
This function is used to list the files to download and the actions to be carried out
after a download:
• memory bank toggling. The SSEB software is stored in a flash memory bank.
SSEB has two memory banks, which allows the user to download a new
software release via Ethernet while keeping the former one as a backup in case
of trouble.
• device reboot. Some parameter changes need a device reboot to be taken into
account.
Note:
If the firmware is not selected, the Download Configuration window does not display any
tasks or download log.

commands.
3. Choose the Configure download... command.
4. Select the firmware to download and/or toggle by clicking on the line.
5. For device rebooting, click on the box at the bottom-left of Figure 4.145 page
358.

358 Chapter 4
Figure 4.145: Firmware downloading (tasks)
4.7.3.2 - Downloading
This function is used to start up downloading of the selected devices.
commands.
5. Choose the Start download... command in the shortcut menu (or the button
on the toolbar or the Download/Start... command in the menu bar).
The following dialogue box is displayed for confirming the downloading operation.
Figure 4.146: Downloading confirmation

Chapter 4 359
Downloading progress is shown as in the figure below:
Figure 4.147: Downloading in progress
4.7.3.3 - After downloading

" Log... command
This function allows the operator to consult the downloading report for the selected
device.
commands.
3. Choose the Log... command.
Figure 4.148: Download log

360 Chapter 4
4.7.4 - Additional commands
" Delete... command

This function is used to remove the encoder in the Devices window.
commands.
3. Choose the Delete... command and click on OK to confirm in the dialogue box
displayed.
" Reach/Refresh... command

This function is used to establish the connection with the encoder after a reboot.
This command is greyed out if the connection is established.
commands.
3. Choose the Reach/Refresh... command.
" Stop download... command

This function is used to stop encoder downloading.
commands.
3. Choose the Stop download... command.
or in the tool bar, click on the button.
" Toggle boot space... command

This function is used to toggle the active flash memory bank.

Chapter 4 361
commands.
3. Choose the Toggle boot space... command.
Note: Before toggling, ensure that the content of the inactive flash memory bank is intact.
This is not the case if downloading has been stopped (for any reason). The software in the
inactive flash memory bank is then corrupt and should not be used.
" Reboot... command

This function is used to reboot the encoder.
commands.
3. Choose the Reboot... command.

362 Chapter 4
4.8 - {Event Log} application
4.8 - {EVENT LOG} APPLICATION
4.8.1 - Principles of the {Event Log} application
The purpose of this paragraph is to list all the functions of the {Event Log}
application.
4.8.1.1 - Event
" Event types
The event types displayed are as follows:
• rising alarm;
• falling alarm;
• reboots;
• device connections;
• device disconnections;
• device configuration changes (activations);
• service switching (to replacing) by INBAND command;
• service switching (to regular) by INBAND command.
" Paired events
Some events can be grouped into pairs.
Paired events are:
• rising and falling alarm;
• service switching to replacing and regular by INBAND command;
• setup and release of connections with devices.
" Parameters displayed
Each event is displayed with the following parameters:
• a record number;
• an event identifier (event_id);
• a sub-identifier (event_extension);
• the name of the device which caused the event;

Chapter 4 363
• the text describing the event;

• the date and local time of event occurrence;
• the duration (this parameter is significant only for rising alarm events).
4.8.1.2 - View configuration functions

These functions facilitate event viewing by displaying just some of the information
according to operator-defined criteria.
" Sorting
Sorting consists of changing the order in which events are displayed in the list. Two
sort options are available:
• sorting by record number;
• sorting by date and time.
" Filtering
Filtering consists of defining events to be displayed on the screen. Those displayed
satisfy the following criteria:
• they belong to event identifier lists;
• they come from given devices;
• they fall between two dates set by the Operator.
" Masking
This function is used to mask the display of certain untimely events. These events
are not deleted, they are simply no longer visible.
" Searching
This function is used to move the cursor in the view of the current event to the event
with which it is paired.
If the search fails (the paired event is not present or not visible on account of the
filter applied), an error message notifies the operator that the command has failed.
4.8.1.3 - Event exporting

It is now possible to export the list of events to a text file.
Any given event is represented over one line, each field of the event being delimited
by a tabulation.

364 Chapter 4
Only events visible in the application are exported and not the entire base. The
resulting text file can then be used from a spreadsheet (e.g. Excel).
4.8.1.4 - Miscellaneous
In the {Event Log} application a text displayed in the status bar informs the
operator of event collection status.
" Title bar

The title bar features the icon associated with the application as well as its name and
the name of the open event log file.
" Menu bar

File Open... Open an event log which can be the current log or a log archived
during the week.
Open current... Open the current event log.
Open previous... Open one of the seven event logs archived during the week.
Export... Export the open event log in text format.
View Refresh Refresh the view following receipt of new events.
Select events... Customise event display by applying masking filters to:
• display certain event types only,
• display certain alarms only,
• display events between two dates,
• display events relating to certain devices.
All events Display all events without changing the configuration of any
filter defined with the View/Select events... command.
Selected events... Apply the filter defined with the View/Select events... command
to the event view.

Chapter 4 365
Tools Report ... Display a statistical report on the open event log.
Calc durations... Calculate the duration between a rising alarm and a falling
alarm or a device reboot.
Help About ... Display the software version.
Operating Access to on-line versions of manuals installed on the
manual Operating Station.
" Tool bar

This is a quick-access command bar featuring icons associated with the most
frequently used commands. Just click on the relevant icon to access the command.
Button Comment
Quit the application. This button has the same effect as the File/Quit command.
Open an event log which can be the current log or a log archived during the
week. This button has the same effect as the File/Open... command.
Indicator showing that new events have arrived in the database. Click on this
icon to refresh the display. This button has the same effect as the Refresh...
command.
Mask the display of certain events. This button has the same effect as the Select
events... command.
" Status bar

The status bar displays general information which the user may require at any time.
This bar features:

• a description of the commands associated with menus;
• an indicator of the selection applied to the base:
All events All the events of the file are displayed;
Selected events Filtering criteria have been applied and not all events
are necessarily displayed.
• the number of the record selected and the total number of events displayed. When

366 Chapter 4
filtering criteria are applied, the total is different from the number of events
contained in the file;
• event collection status:
No event collection The {Equipment Interface} application has not been
run, the icon flashes to signal a problem. If the icon is
not visible the {Equipment Interface} application is
open but event collection is not enabled.;
Collecting events… The {Equipment Interface} application is open and
set to collect events.
• a simulator mode indicator:
<space> Simulator mode is disabled;
Simulator mode Simulator mode is enabled.

Chapter 4 367
" Main window (table of events)
Figure 4.149: Table of events
The main view of the application displays the table of events contained in the event
log being consulted.
The Operator can drag and drop column titles to change column display order.
The parameters displayed for each event are:
• the record number;
• an icon according to event type;
• two numbers (id and ext) providing unique identification for the event;
• the name of the relevant device;
• the text describing the event;
• the date and time of occurrence (PC’s local time);

368 Chapter 4
• the duration.
A shortcut menu attached to each event gives access to commands for finding the
paired event (in certain conditions see Find paired events page 374 and quickly
filtering the selected event (see Quickly filter an event type page 375).
The command for finding a paired event is also available by double-clicking on an
item in the table.
4.8.3 - Commands
4.8.3.1 - Commands for opening an event log file

" Opening an archived event log file
The File/Open command in the menu bar or the quick-access button replaces
the log displayed in the application by the one contained in an archived file. These
commands display standard dialogue box for selecting an event log file whose
extension must be .db.
Figure 4.150: Opening an archived event log file
" Opening the current event log

The File/Open current command in the menu bar replaces the event log displayed
in the application by the current event log.

Chapter 4 369
If it fails to open a message informs the user accordingly and the file being viewed
remains open.
If file reading occurs normally the application’s title bar is updated and the events in
the current file appear in the main window.
This command is disabled when the open file is the current file.
Note: Filtering criteria apply on file opening. Certain events may therefore not be displayed.
" Opening a file archived during the week

The File/Open previous command in the menu bar gives quick access to an event
log archived during the week.
Backup files are attached to each day of the week:
• Monday: Evtlog01.db file
• Tuesday: Evtlog02.db file
• Wednesday: Evtlog03.db file
• Thursday: Evtlog04.db file
• Friday: Evtlog05.db file
• Saturday: Evtlog06.db file
• Sunday: Evtlog07.db file
If it fails to open (the file is not in the current directory for instance) a message
informs the user accordingly and the file being viewed remains open.
4.8.3.2 - Command for exporting in text format

The File/Export... command in the menu bar is only available if the base opened
successfully. It creates a text file containing the events displayed in the main
window.
Important: To export the entire open event log all filtering must be cancelled
beforehand.
File format:
<#>→<UTC date>→<type>→<level>→<id>→<ext>→<desc>→<device_name>→
<text>→<duration>↵
The symbols → and ↵ replace the tabulation and 'carriage return' characters which
do not appear on print-outs.

370 Chapter 4
<#> Record number of the event in the log file.
<UTC date> UTC date and time of the event. The date format
depends on the settings in the Windows control panel.
<type> Event type: rising alarm, falling alarm, reboot,

connection, disconnection, activation, service switch,
service switch back, auto backup, si update.
<level> minor, major, not applicable.
<id> Event identifier.
<ext> Event sub-identifier. The <id>, <ext> pair provides

unique identification for an event.
<desc> Number containing the parameters of the event. Its

meaning depends on the event. It can contain a bitrate,
a PID, a service_id, etc.
<device_name> Name of the device as displayed in the application

without its type.
<text> Descriptive text displayed in the application in English

or French depending on settings.
<duration> Duration associated with the event. This field is blank

when insignificant. See section Calculation of
durations page 378.
Example:
Figure 4.151: Example of a text file after log exporting
When this command is run, a dialogue box requests the Operator to enter the name
of the target file. The default file name is that of the open file with the extension .txt.
Only the .txt extension is accepted.

Chapter 4 371
If the name entered by the Operator is that of an existing file, confirmation is

requested before overwriting.
The directory selected by the Operator is stored and displayed as the default backup
directory when the command is next run.
The export file format is suitable for use with a spreadsheet such as Excel.
Figure 4.152: Example of an exported file open in Excel
4.8.3.3 - Display commands

" Refresh the view
When the open event log is the current event log, the View/Refresh command in the
menu bar or the quick-access button updates the display following the receipt
of new events.
If the events added to the log satisfy the display criteria they are displayed in the
main window.
The selection remains unchanged after a refresh.
These commands are disabled when the open file is not the current file or as long as
no new events have been received.
" Selecting (filtering) displayed events
The View/Select events command in the menu bar and the quick-access button
are only available if the base opened successfully.
These commands are used to customise event display in the main view by masking
certain events.
The filtering criteria available enable the Operator to display just
• certain event types;
• certain alarms;
• events between two dates;

372 Chapter 4
• events relating to certain devices.

The selected filtering criteria are stored when the Operator quits the application and
reapply when the View/Selected events command is run (see page 374).
When the command is run the following dialogue box is displayed:
Figure 4.153: Filtering criteria
This box includes four sections:

• Display the events;
• From alarm display;
• From devices;
• For the period.
Choice of event types to display

Chapter 4 373
Only checkmarked events will be visible. By default, when the application is first
used the All events option is selected.
The types available depend on the events featured in the table, a list of events is
displayed by default (see page 362).
If the open file contains unknown event types, these also appear in this list as a
character string comprising the word Event followed by the event identifier.
It is possible to select or deselect all the items in the list using the Select all and
Deselect all commands in the popup menu attached to the list.
Alarm management
When rising or falling alarms are selected filtering can be refined, by either masking
certain alarms, or restricting the display to certain alarms.
The + and – buttons opposite each list can be used to add or remove an alarm.
To add an alarm to a list select the + button or run the Add command in the popup
menu attached to the list and enter the alarm’s identifier and sub-identifier.
Figure 4.154: Add an alarm dialogue box
The Alarm id field must be between 1 and 191.

Devices
Filtering can be set to display just events relating to certain devices.
The list of devices is derived from the devices featured in the table. The device
names are sorted in alphabetical order.
It is possible to select or deselect all the items in the list using the Select all and
Deselect all commands in the popup menu attached to the list.
Filtering period
Each event is signed by a date and a time given by the device clock.
It is possible to introduce time as a filtering parameter to display only events
collected between two specific dates.

374 Chapter 4
There are two possible options:
Entire log: This is the default option. The date and time are not
included in the selection criteria.
Only the events occurring between:

The operator specifies the dates and times concerned
by the selection.
" Display all events
The View/All events command in the menu bar is only available if the base opened
successfully. It is used to display all the events without changing the configuration
of any filter defined with the View/Select events command.
When this command is run, a checkmark appears next to the command title. To
delete this checkmark run the View/Selected events command (see section 4.2.8).
" Display selected events
The View/Selected events command in the menu bar is only available if the base
opened successfully. It is used to apply the filter defined with the View/Select
events... command to the event view.
When this command is run, a checkmark appears next to the command title. To
delete this checkmark run the View/All events command (see previous section).
" Find paired events
To facilitate event list scanning, a command in the shortcut menu attached to the
main window is available to go to the event paired with the selected event (see page
362 for the list of events concerned by this command).
The title of this command depends on the item type selected:
• for a rising (raising) alarm the associated command is Go to the clearing alarm.
• for a falling (clearing) alarm the associated command is Go to the raising alarm.
• for a service switch (to replacing) the associated command is Go to the service
switch back.
• for a service switch back (to regular) the associated command is Go to the service
switch.
• for a connection the associated command is Go to the disconnection.
• for a disconnection the associated command is Go to the connection.
Let us consider the following example:

Chapter 4 375
Figure 4.155: Example of a search for a paired event (1 of 2)
Select the raising 697 event and double-click or run the Go to the clearing alarm
command.
If the clearing event is present the cursor automatically goes to this item.
Figure 4.156: Example of a search for a paired event (2 of 2)
In certain cases (e.g. if a filter is applied to raising alarms only) the search can fail
in which case an error message is displayed:
Figure 4.157: Message indicating search failure
The title of the error message varies according to the event type sought.
" Quickly filter an event type
This function is used to quickly mask a type of event without using the filtering
configuration screen. Just select the relevant event in the main view and run the
Mask this event command in the shortcut menu.
Figure 4.158: Quickly filtering an event type

376 Chapter 4
Notes:
1. All the events of the same type as the one selected disappear from the view. This concerns
all devices and not just the selected device.
2. Masking can be disabled by changing the configuration parameters available with the
View/Select events... command.
" Sort display order

This command is used to sort events for display either by record number or by date
and time.
Sorting is activated by clicking directly on the column in the main view. One click
sorts in ascending order, a second click in descending order. The selection remains
unchanged after sorting.
4.8.3.4 - Calculation commands

" Statistics
The Tools/Report command in the menu bar is only available if the base opened
successfully. It produces a report from the open event log.
When this command is run, a dialogue box is displayed to select the period for
analysis.
Figure 4.159: Edit events report
This command displays a summary table per device for the chosen period:

Chapter 4 377
Figure 4.160: Example of an events report
In the table the items are sorted in ascending alphabetical order by device name.
The table format is as follows:
<device> Device name
<alarms> Number of alarms on the device
<major> Number of major alarms on the device
<minor> Number of minor alarms on the device
<reboots> Number of device reboots
<disconnections> Number of device disconnections
<others> Total of other events related to the device
<total> Total of all events related to the device

378 Chapter 4
" Calculation of durations
The Tools/Calc durations... command in the menu bar is used to calculate the
duration between a rising alarm and a falling alarm or the next device reboot. Given
the time required for the calculation, this command is only available on backup files
and the Operator has to confirm command execution.
Once the calculation has been performed, the duration of each event is displayed in
the Duration column in the main window.
Durations are stored in the event log file. It is not necessary to recalculate duration
each time a file is opened.
Note: When the calculation proves impossible (if the falling alarm is not saved in the same
file) or duration is insignificant, the Duration column remains blank.

Chapter 4 379
4.9 - {Alarm Help} application
4.9 - {ALARM HELP} APPLICATION
4.9.1 - Scope
This application get electronic on-line help about alarms generated by supervised
devices.
The online help application is run like any other DBS 2930 "Stand-Alone"
application or automatically via the {Monitoring & Redundancy} and
{EventLog} applications. It can also be run from the command line.
4.9.2 - Features
4.9.2.1 - Extended description of alarms

For each alarm or event, the {Alarm help} application provides the following
extended information:
• Alarm AID (number), e.g.: 5;
• Alarm AID (text), e.g.: AID_ALIM;
• Alarm extension id (number, if passed through the command line);
• Alarm severity (major/minor) + icon (red for major, orange for minor);
• Wording of the alarm (as in the Alarms Window of the {Monitoring &
Redundancy} application) (text in English or French);
• Category of the alarm. Matches X733 standard categories when possible
(Equipment, QoS, etc.);
• Autobackup current capability (Selectable / Impossible) indicates if this device is
allowed to trigger automatic redundancy switch-over for itself;
• Autobackup upstream capability (Selectable / Impossible) indicates if this device
is allowed to trigger automatic redundancy switch-over for the upstream device;
• Probable cause (text in English or French);
• X733 standard probable cause (only displayed when applicable);
• Action to take (text in English or French);
• Source device(s) (text);
• User comments (text).

380 Chapter 4
4.9.2.2 - Print capability

A print command is used to print either the displayed alarm, all alarms or all the
alarms regarding one device type. All fields are systematically printed except user
comments. The user can choose whether to print them or not. Printing (and display)
is carried out according to the current language selected.
4.9.2.3 - Search engine

By entering an AID (and possibly AlarmIdExtension and/or AlarmIdDescription),
the {Alarm help} application jumps to the alarm page identified by this AID. If
several alarms have the same AID, the first of the list is displayed. It also searches
for a word in general and displays all the alarms containing this word. The search
result is displayed in the Summary window. Then, when selecting the alarm, the
usual online help is displayed.
4.9.2.4 - Navigation tool

The {Alarm help} application is used to go to the previous, next, first or last alarm
in the entire list of potential alarms (not the active alarm lists displayed in the
master application). Alarms are sorted by AID and then by cause.

and {Event Log} applications
From the {Monitoring & Redundancy} and {Event Log} applications, there is a
command that automatically runs the {Alarm help} application and displays the
selected alarm. When the {Alarm help} application has already been run, no new
instance of this application is run, its display is just updated.
4.9.2.6 - Synchronisation with other applications

Other applications can use the {Alarm help} application by selecting the command
line with the alarm parameters: AlarmId, AlarmIdExtension, AlarmIdDescription.
See Access via any application page 383.
4.9.2.7 - User defined comments

The {Alarm help} application enables the user to add comments for one alarm.
These comments are saved on the disk and are still kept after a soft patch. If an

Chapter 4 381
alarm has been deleted in a new patch, the corresponding user comment entry is
also deleted. A comment can be 4096 characters long and is completely modifiable
(Cut/Copy/Paste) by an edit command. It can only store alphanumeric characters.
They are independent of language settings.
4.9.2.8 - French/English versions

The graphical user interface is available in either English or in French. It depends
on language settings when the {Alarm Help} application is installed.
4.9.2.9 - Customisation of display

The following fields are optional and may be shown or hidden in the {Alarm help}
application window:
• Wording;
• Autobackup current and Autobackup upstream;
• Action to take;
• User comment;
• Source device(s);
• Cause;
• X733 standard probable cause;
• Category.
4.9.2.10 - Summary of alarms

The summary displays all available alarms sorted by AID. AID name and alarm
wording are also displayed to recover an alarm. While selecting an alarm in this list,
the {Alarm help} application is automatically updated. See User Interface (main
window and commands) page 384
4.9.2.11 - Help / About

A help/about command displays the {Alarm help} application version and a
number identifying the table content.

382 Chapter 4
4.9.3 - Access to the {Alarm help} application
4.9.3.1 - Access via the {Monitoring &Redundancy} application

The {Alarm help} application is accessible:
• via the menu toolbar help command: This only runs the {Alarm help}
application (no alarm is selected).
Figure 4.161: Access from {Monitoring &Redundancy}
• by selecting an alarm in the Alarms window in the {Monitoring &

Redundancy} application and pressing the <F1> key.
• by right-clicking on a shortcut menu attached to an alarm and selecting Display
help.
Figure 4.162: Contextual Display help... command attached to an alarm
4.9.3.2 - Access via the {Event Log} application

The {Alarm help} application is accessible:
• via the menu toolbar help command;
• by selecting an alarm in the Alarms window and pressing the <F1> key;
• by right-clicking on a shortcut menu attached to an alarm or an event and
selecting Display help.

Chapter 4 383
4.9.3.3 - Access via any application

{Alarm help} is an independent application (.exe) and can be accessed from the
command line. Parameters are optional. Here are the use cases:
• AlarmHelp
{Alarm help} has been run and displays the first alarm.
• AlarmHelp <AlarmId>
displays the first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId.
• AlarmHelp <AlarmId> <AlarmIdExtension>
displays the first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId and AlarmIdExtension.
• AlarmHelp <AlarmId> <AlarmIdExtension> <AlarmIdDescription>
displays the first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId, AlarmIdExtension and
AlarmIdDescription.
with <AlarmId>: integer, <AlarmIdExtension>: integer, <AlarmIdDescription>:
integer.
Figure 4.163: Access via a command line

(here, first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId = 1)
If no alarm is found or if the previous format is not respected, an error message box
is displayed: Alarm not found. {Alarm Help} will display the nearest one.

384 Chapter 4
4.9.4 - User Interface (main window and commands)
A resizable pop-up window displays the previously selected alarm:
Figure 4.164: Alarm Help main window
In the menu bar, the database and DBS 2930 "Stand-Alone" versions are available
via the Help/About database... and Help/About Alarm Help... commands in the
menu bar.
All other commands can be found at the top of the window. Each button
corresponds to one command (Summary, First, Previous, Next, Last, Search,
Print, Configure).
Summary Summary button displays the list of available alarms.

Chapter 4 385
First {Alarm help} application displays the first alarm of

the alarm list.
Previous {Alarm help} application displays the previous alarm

of the current alarm list.
Next {Alarm help} application displays the next alarm of

the current alarm list.
Last {Alarm help} application displays the last alarm of the

current alarm list.
Search... The Search button displays a dialogue box and the user
has to enter the AID or the AID and ALARM
IdExtension and/or AlarmIdDescription of the alarm
he or she wants to find.
If the alarm is not found, an error message box is
displayed and the {Alarm help} application still
displays the previous alarm. It also searches for a word
among the entire list of alarms and displays the search
result in the summary window. The user has to select
the alarm containing the word and the main window is
updated. When the summary is closed, the main
window displays the searched alarm.
Figure 4.165: Search dialogue box
Print Click on the Print button to display a dialogue box and

select the type of print job and whether the user
comments are to be printed or not (check box). A

386 Chapter 4
preview button displays the print preview (with

QuickReport 3.0.5).
Figure 4.166: Print dialogue box
Here are the types of available print options:

(Print) Displayed alarm.
Here is an example of a print job for the current alarm:
Figure 4.167: Example of a print job

Chapter 4 387
(Print) Alarm regarding one device type

Select All Alarms of one device in the dialogue box and
then select the type of device.
Here is an extract from a print job for all alarms
regarding one device type (switcher):
(Print) All alarms

Select All Alarms in the dialogue box. The format is
the same as for the displayed alarm.
Configure The Configure button opens a list of fields that may be

displayed or not. By default, all fields are displayed.

388 Chapter 4
Figure 4.168: Configure dialogue box
If the User comments box is selected, user comments

are displayed in the main window of the {Alarm Help}
application and can be edited via another dialogue box
accessible by clicking on the User Comment
hyperlink:
Figure 4.169: Comments editor

Chapter 4 389
Comments are edited by directly typing the text in the

dialogue box panel. They are saved once the user
selects OK. If Cancel is selected, all modifications are
deleted and the user comments panel reverts to its
previous state.
Delete, Copy and Paste respectively delete the selected
text, copy it to clipboard and paste it from the
clipboard.

390 Chapter 4
4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application
4.10 - COMMANDS AVAILABLE WITH THE TELNET

APPLICATION
This section describes how to use the Telnet application. It also explains the role of
parameters available to the user.
The following parameters can be edited by the user:
• Audio stream type,
• LTW offset,
• Superencoder source switching mode,
• VBI stream type,
• IP Communication.
• LDSChurch mode,
• ABSAT mode,
• Multichoice-D1 mode,
• Foxtel 6dB uplift,
• Closed caption type,
• Extended-data insertion (line 284).
Note: editing parameters other than those described can lead to major device
malfunction.
4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application
This section describes how to access the Telnet application and edit the parameters.
The definition of editable parameters is given in the following section.

Chapter 4 391
1) On the PC connected to the device, run the Telnet command to open the applica-
tion.
2) Select Remote System under the Connect command in the Telnet (None) window
3) In the Connect window, enter the device IP address and click on the Connect
button to validate

392 Chapter 4
Once the connection has been established with the device, the following window is
displayed:
4) Do not enter a User name and press Enter on the keyboard. The following
window is displayed:
5) Enter setup after the {Runtime@SSEB}/r0: prompt
6) Do not enter a Password and press Enter on the keyboard

Chapter 4 393
7) Enter edit after the SETUP prompt
8) The window displays several choices, select 8 operating mode

394 Chapter 4
The first editable parameter is displayed.
The example above shows the Video bidir parameter which can be set to ON if the
value 1 is entered or OFF if the value 0 is entered. The value in brackets indicates
the current parameter value. If you press Enter on the keyboard without indicating a
value, the current value is kept and the next parameter displayed. The next param-
eter is also displayed if you enter a new value. All the parameters are displayed and
edited in the same way:

Chapter 4 395
9) When all the parameters have been displayed, the window again displays several
choices. Select 0 Exit to display the SETUP prompt:
10) Enter quit after the SETUP prompt

The Save setup ? question is displayed. Enter y.
The Are you sure ? question is displayed. Enter y.

396 Chapter 4
The Setup has been saved message is displayed to confirm that changes have been
saved.
Note: the changes will be applied when the device is next booted up.
4.10.2 - IP Settings
The IP Address, IP Netmask and Default gateway parameters can be edited via the
Telnet application. To do this:
1) follow the instructions in section 4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application up until
window 8). Select 2 : ethernet IP address

Chapter 4 397
2) the IP parameters window is displayed:
3) enter the parameter values as indicated in steps 8), 9) and 10) of the section
4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application.
Note: the changes will be applied when the device is next booted up.
4.10.3 - Parameter definitions
The parameter editing procedure is described in the previous section.
4.10.3.1 - Video bidir

Video bidir (ON:1 OFF:0) (x)?
This parameter applies to very specific applications and should not be edited.
Default value = 0.
4.10.3.2 - Audio stream type

Audio stream type (MPEG1:3 MPEG2:4) (x)?
This parameter defines the Audio stream type value so that it corresponds to either
MPEG1 (value3) or MPEG2 (value 4). Default value = 3.
All Audio components generated by the encoder will have the same audio stream
type and no combination is possible.

398 Chapter 4
4.10.3.3 - LTW_offset
Set LTW_offset flag when service PCR (Yes:1 No:2) (x)?
This parameter tells the encoder whether or not it should add the LTW offset value
to the video when the video is carrying the PCR. Default value = 1.
4.10.3.4 - SPE (SuperEncoder) switch source mode

SPE switch source mode (same as old board:1 same as new board:2) (x)?
This parameter is used to choose the SuperEncoder board switch mode:
• if you have an old version of the board (version AG), mode 1 must be selected
• if you have a recent version of the board (versions AH, AJ or AK), mode 2
must be selected. However, if the video input signals are not synchronous then
interference caused by the switch appears on the picture. In this case mode 1
can be used to reduce interference.
4.10.3.5 - VBI stream type

VBI stream_type with MT lines (ISO:1 BARCO:2) (x)?
This parameter is used to choose the stream type value used for Monochrome trans-
parent VBI components. The (ISO) default value is the 0x06 standardised value.
The other possible (BARCO) value is 0x92 which corresponds to a BARCO propri-
etary value used for Monochrome transparent lines.
All Monochrome transparent lines generated by the encoder have either a 0x06 or
0x92 stream type value and no combination is possible.
A descriptor must be added to the PMT. See {Technical Configuration} application
section Editing parameters of the VBI component page 264.
4.10.3.6 - LDSChurch mode

LDSChurch mode -ignored when SPE board is declared- (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ?
This mode only concerns operation in 60Hz mode. When the mode is set to ON, the
active lines in fields 1 and 2 are moved up a line. The first active line is therefore
line 21 for field 1 and line 284 for field 2 (the first line being line 1). This mode is
used to transmit the sub-titles as a useful part of the video signal.

Chapter 4 399
On a DBE 4130 or 4150 Encoder featuring a SuperEncoder board, this parameter is

not acknowledged and the lines are not moved up. The SuperEncoder board is
detected when the device is turned on.
Checking the "closed caption" box in the DBS 2930 Operating station, video
component parameters VBI tab is unnecessary. If the box is checked, the sub-titles
will be transmitted in the video stream twice (as user data and in line 21).
Default value = 2
4.10.3.7 - ABSAT mode

ABSat mode (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ?
This mode, designed for the DBE 4130 Encoder, is used to modify Video encoding
so that it is compatible with Philips "G+2" series decoders. When ABsat mode has
been selected:
- the VBV delay value is calculated and sent for each picture,
- the default quantisation matrix is systematically included for each I-picture.
The DBE 4130 Encoder in ABSat mode remains DVB compliant.
Notes:
- operation in ABSat mode is not guaranteed with decoders other than Philips
"G+2" series decoders.
- ABsat mode has been designed for the DBE 4130 Encoder. Operation in ABsat
mode is not guaranteed for other DBE 41XX Encoders.
- ABsat mode only operates in 50Hz mode.
- the Helper Channel application, which is a specific function of the DBE 4120
Encoder, does not operate in ABsat mode.
Default value = 2
4.10.3.8 - Multichoice-D1 mode

Multichoice-D1 mode (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ?
This mode implements an MPEG-2 syntax specifically for the video component.
- Each PES contains a single GOP,
- The PES is formatted as follows:

400 Chapter 4
- the DataAlignmentIndicator bit is set to 1 (PES payload begins on a video

"Elementary Stream" header),
- the PES data length field uses 10 bytes instead of 11 for I and P-pictures (a
0xFF stuffing byte has been deleted).
- There is no stuffing byte between pictures at "Elementary Stream" level (no 16-bit
alignment),
- There is no stuffing "Elementary Stream" (minimum payload at TS level).
When the mode is set to OFF, each PES contains a picture, the DataAlignmentIndi-
cator is set to 0, the PES data length field uses 11 bytes, there is a number of stuffing
"Elementary Streams" (required to align the start of the PES with the start of the TS
packet) and there is no longer 16-bit alignment.
Default value = 2.
4.10.3.9 - Foxtel 6dB uplift

Foxtel 6dB uplift (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ?
This mode adds +6dB of gain to audio samples encoded in MPEG-1 by the SSEB
board. The audio is doubled before peak limiting and encoding.
All SSEB board audio inputs are concerned:
- SDI,
- Analogue audio converted to digital.
All audio components encoded by the SSEB board are affected.
AES/EBU audio signals generated by the ATADI board are affected.
The 2.1kHz test signal, 0dB generated by the SSEB board is not affected.
Audio signals generated by the AMUSE board are not affected.
The uncompressed audio mode (DBE 4120) is not affected.
Note: you are advised not to use Foxtel mode and a 384Kbit/s bitrate at the same
time, as in this case audio quality is not guaranteed.
Default value = 2

Chapter 4 401
4.10.3.10 - Closed Caption type

Closed Caption type -only with DBE4130- (DVB/ATSC:1 DVB/DSS:2) (x) ?
In 60Hz mode, the DBE 41XX can extract line 21 sub-title information (the first
line being line 1) from the video input signal (if the information is modulated and
not binary) and can insert it into the "Video Elementary stream" according to the
ATSC A/53 standard. This is done when the "Closed caption" box is checked in the
Technical Configuration application, video component advanced parameters, VBI
tab.
With a DBE 4130 Encoder, the sub-titles can be inserted into the "Video Elementary
stream" according to two standards:
DVB/ATSC: 1 = "DVB / ATSC A/53" standard,
DVB/DSS: 2 = "DTV95MDB-04, DirectTV MPEG1 and MPEG2 video stream
specifications for IRDs, version 2.1" standard.
This parameter does not affect the MPEG-2 TS layer or the PSI and SI tables.
This function is only implemented on DBE 4130 Encoders. On other DBE 41XX
Encoders, the parameter value is set to 1.
Default value = 1 (DVB/ATSC A/53)
4.10.3.11 - Extended-data insertion (line 284)

Extended-data insertion (line 284) -only with DBE4130- (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ?
Line 21 of the second field (i.e. line 284) can contain information similar to sub-title
information known as "extended data services".
This parameter can have two values:
2 = OFF
1 = ON, the "extended data services" data is extracted from the video input signal
(only in modulated form) and inserted into the "Video Elementary stream" syntax in
the same way as the sub-titles.
This function is only implemented on DBE 4130 Encoders operating in 60Hz mode.
On other DBE 41XX Encoders, the parameter value is set to 2 (OFF).
Default value = 2
Notes concerning Closed Caption type and Extended-data insertion (line 284)
parameters:

402 Chapter 4
- A minor alarm will be raised if the Extended-data insertion (line 284) parameter is
set to 1 and no data is present in the input signal.
- The video component syntax defines "a data type identifier" which has the value
0x09 for sub-titles and 0x0A for "extended data services" data.
- If the DBE 4130 Encoder must be switched to 50Hz mode, the Extended-data
insertion (line 284) parameter must be set to 2 (OFF) before the Encoder is
switched from 60Hz to 50Hz mode.
The follow table gives permitted combinations for the Closed Caption and
Extended Data parameters:
Operating station Encoder configuration Result

Closed Caption Closed Caption Extended Data
ON/OFF ATSC/DSS ON/OFF
0 0 0 No Closed Caption and no

Extended Data
0 0 1 Do not use
0 1 0 No Closed Caption and no
Extended Data
0 1 1 DSS Extended Data
0 0 0 ATSC Closed Caption
1 0 1 Do not use
1 1 0 DSS Closed Caption
1 1 1 DSS Closed Caption and
DSS Extended Data
Except for the restrictions given in the table above, any combination of the five
ABSat, LDS, Multichoice, Closed Caption, Extended Data parameters is permitted.

Chapter 5 - PC operation - Fast_DSNG software 403
Chapter 5
PC operation - Fast_DSNG software
5.1 - Fast-DSNG .......................................................................................... 405
5.2 - Software presentation........................................................................ 407
5.3 - Interfaces ............................................................................................ 410

5.3.1 - Encoder interface.......................................................................... 410
5.3.2 - Modulator/up-converter interface.................................................. 410
5.3.3 - Graphic interface .......................................................................... 410
5.4 - Functions ............................................................................................ 411

5.4.1 - Modulator configuration ................................................................ 411
5.4.2 - Encoder configuration................................................................... 411
5.4.3 - Supervision ................................................................................... 411
5.5 - Operation ............................................................................................ 413

5.5.1 - General principles......................................................................... 413
5.5.2 - Setup panel................................................................................... 414
5.5.3 - Transmission panel....................................................................... 416
5.5.3.1 - Transmission parameters ............................................................ 417
5.5.3.2 - Parameters linked to encoder control and signal content ............ 419
5.5.4 - Alarms panel................................................................................. 426
5.5.5 - Scrambling panel .......................................................................... 427
5.5.6 - Information panel .......................................................................... 429
5.5.7 - Preset panel.................................................................................. 430
5.5.8 - Dynamic behaviour ....................................................................... 432
5.5.8.1 - No connection .............................................................................. 432
5.5.8.2 - Setting up a connection ............................................................... 432

404 Chapter 5
BLANK PAGE

Chapter 5 405
5.1 - Fast-DSNG
5.1 - FAST-DSNG
A DSNG system is used to transmit pictures and sound between the site of an event
and a professional television (producer, television channel, etc.).
The signals are produced at the site of the event from a mobile system containing
the equipment required to produce video and audio signals and transmit them to a
site for broadcast via a satellite link.
The size of the DSNG system can vary considerably, depending on the coverage
desired for the event and the mobility required. A DSNG system can just as easily
be a camera, encoder, satellite modulator/up-converter which can fit into one or two
flight cases, as several O.B. vans containing cameras, mixing desks, encoders,
cables, etc.
" Those involved in DSNG systems are:
- satellite operators;
- satellite antenna manufacturers;
- satellite modem manufacturers;
- manufacturers of power amplifiers and RF systems;
- video encoder/decoder manufacturers;
- audio encoder/decoder manufacturers;
- supervision system manufacturers;
- systems integrators.
" Setting up DSNG communications
Setting up a satellite link requires that a procedure defined by the satellite operator
be followed:
1. The satellite operator notifies the DSNG operator of the:
- position of the satellite;
- transmission power;
- uplink frequency;
- bandwidth;
- downlink frequency after frequency translation by the satellite.
2. The DSNG operator contacts the reception station by telephone and begins a
connection procedure.
3. This operator directs the satellite antenna and transmits a low power, pure carrier
on the uplink frequency. When communication occurs on frequency C-band, spec-
tral inversion may be required.

406 Chapter 5
5.1 - Fast-DSNG
4. The reception station confirms reception of the signal.

5. From this moment onwards, the DSNG operator can no longer interrupt the
signal transmitted to the satellite because signal absence may be interpreted by
automatic frequency allocation systems as availability of the frequency and band-
width.
6. The DSNG operator increases the power and sets the modulator to modulation
mode.
7. If the operator has a decoder and his geographical position enables him to receive
the transmitted signal, he checks that the transmission is being sent correctly. In the
event of a problem, he may also check the signal at the modulator output by using
the L-BAND output.

Chapter 5 407
5.2 - Software presentation
5.2 - SOFTWARE PRESENTATION
" Purpose
This software is supplied as standard with DBE 4110 encoders.
The main purpose of this software is to facilitate input of the parameters required
for setting up a satellite link on the encoders and the modulator. Configuration using
the graphic interface is very simple. The operator can display all the transmission
parameters together with the composition of the transmitted signal on six screens.
Configuration changes are optimised by reducing operator actions.
The software operates on a PC (laptop) with standard performance, featuring:
- Windows 95, 98 or NT operating system;
- Ethernet 10BaseT interface;
- 640x800 colour screen with 256 colours;
- pointer device (mouse or other).
The application is only available in English.

408 Chapter 5
" Environment
Three configurations are supported in the software.
satellite
dish
HPA
(poser amplifier)
RF
upconverter
FI
Modulator LBand Decoder
ASI
Pilot encoder
ASI
Second encoder
Configuration 1: one encoder only

Configuration 2: one encoder and one modulator. The modulator is controlled by
the encoder (called the main encoder) which must feature the N41SMODC option
(NEWTEC modulator control) or the ISMB board.
Configuration 3: two encoders and one modulator. The modulator is controlled by
one of the encoders (called the main encoder) which must feature the N41SMODC
option (NEWTEC modulator control) or the ISMB board. The output of the second
encoder is connected to the ASI input of the main encoder. The main encoder must
feature the N41STSIN option (ASI TS input processing).

Chapter 5 409
The other devices that can be used in a DSNG system (redundant encoders, deco-
ders, power amplifiers, up-converter) are not controlled by this software, apart from
the up-converter when it is incorporated into the modulator.

410 Chapter 5
5.3 - Interfaces
5.3 - INTERFACES
5.3.1 - Encoder interface
The encoders are controlled/monitored by an Ethernet 10BaseT interface in TCP/IP

using the NEXTREAM protocol.
Configuration 3 (with two encoders) requires a hub to allow the two encoders to be
controlled from the same PC.
5.3.2 - Modulator/up-converter interface
The modulator/up-converter is controlled/monitored via the main encoder which

must feature the N41SMODC option (Ext. Modulator C&C) or the ISMB board.
5.3.3 - Graphic interface
The graphic interface is a standard Windows interface.

Chapter 5 411
5.4 - Functions
5.4 - FUNCTIONS
Fast_DSNG software is used to display and modify part of the configuration of the
modulator and encoders.
5.4.1 - Modulator configuration
The parameters which can be modified are:

- output mode (off, pure carrier, on);
- attenuation of the output signal;
- symbol rate or bandwidth;
- RF frequency;
- convolution and FEC;
- activation of spectral inversion.
5.4.2 - Encoder configuration
The main parameters that can be modified are:

- list of components inserted into the signal;
- enabling/disabling of scrambling for all the components;
- session word used for scrambling and parity;
- bit rate of each component (the bit rate can be calculated automatically for video
components).
The DVB signalling information associated with the service and network is automa-
tically set by the software.
5.4.3 - Supervision
The available supervision functions are:

- display of the active alarms list of the encoders;
- level of each alarm;

412 Chapter 5
5.4 - Functions
- display of the serial numbers of the encoders;

- display of the software and hardware options installed on each encoder.

Chapter 5 413
5.5 - Operation
5.5 - OPERATION
5.5.1 - General principles
The graphic interface of the DSNG application is a 6-panel dialogue box:

- Transmission;
- Alarms;
- Scrambling;
- Information;
- Preset;
- Setup.
You move from one panel to another by clicking the tabs of the relevant panels or
pressing the function keys F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 or F8 for panels 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
All parameters can be edited with the mouse. Just click on the small calculator
image to the right of each parameter editing field:
Figure 5.1: Numeric keypad

414 Chapter 5
5.5 - Operation
5.5.2 - Setup panel
This panel is mainly used on initial application start-up.

It allows the software to be configured to indicate:
- whether Control/Command communication of the equipment is enabled or disa-
bled;
- the system configuration (1, 2 or 3);
- the parameters required for setting up the Control/Command links of the encoders,
i.e. their IP address.
The parameters are saved to the hard disk and are read automatically each time the
software is started up. They are saved in a file of the Windows initialisation file
(.ini) type.
Figure 5.2: Setup panel
The choice of configuration and IP addresses of the encoders is only possible when
communication with the devices is stopped. To do this, press the button in the
bottom left hand of the window.
Follow the instructions in the box on the right-hand side of the panel:
• Enter the IP address of the first encoder,

Chapter 5 415
5.5 - Operation
• Select other devices, modulator or a second encoder:

- Check Controls a modulator box (if a modulator is present),
- Check Uses an external signal in TS input box, to enable the TS input (the option
is present in the first encoder) to be connected to an external device not controlled
by the {Fast_DSNG} application,
- Check Use and Control a second encoder box, to allow the control of a second
encoder. The TS input option must be present in the second encoder (check Use
an external signal in TS input box), enter its IP address,
- Enter the name of the service in the Station name put in window, 6 characters plus
-1 (or -2).
Caution!
The encoder(s) and the PC must have different IP addresses. If two devices have the same
IP address, software behaviour may be unpredictable.
When the information has been entered, press Connect to DSNG system to start up
Control/Command communication with devices.
When communication is enabled, the software attempts to set up communication
with the encoder(s) in order to gather the configuration information displayed to the
user in the other panels.

416 Chapter 5
5.5 - Operation
5.5.3 - Transmission panel
The Transmission panel is the most frequently used panel.

It is displayed by default on starting up the application if the parameters required for
starting communications were found in the initialisation file.
Figure 5.3: Transmission panel
It is divided vertically into two areas:

- transmission parameters are displayed on the left;
- parameters linked to encoder control and signal content are displayed on the right.
Note: If a modulator is used, the Transmission page can be used to change the L-Band
Frequency parameter.

Chapter 5 417
5.5 - Operation
5.5.3.1 - Transmission parameters

Transmission parameters are found in two areas. The upper area is used during the
procedure for setting up satellite communication. The lower area is used for confi-
guring the modulator.
In the upper part, four buttons control the modulator output:
• In Off position (key F9), the modulator does not transmit a signal. The
operator can then set the modulation parameters (frequency, bandwidth, etc.) in
the lower area. The application does not send any configuration to encoder.
• In Ready position (key F10), the modulator does not transmit, the parameters
can no longer be edited. The software sends the configuration to the encoders.
• In any Pure carrier position (key F11), the modulator transmits a pure carrier
with the level displayed under the button. The parameters entered in the lower
area can no longer be edited.
• In Modulation position (key F12), the modulator transmits a modulated signal
with the level set to High. In this mode, level and modulation parameters can
no longer be edited.
Note: If the system is disconnected, all the devices remain in the initial state.
The parameters displayed in the lower area can only be modified in the Off position
(key F9). Access is unauthorised in the other positions and the cursor indicates this
by changing its form ( ).
The Symbol rate and Bandwidth parameters are interlinked by a formula that
involves the Convolution parameter. Each time the operator changes one of these
three, the Bandwidth and/or Symbol rate parameters are recalculated immediately.
Thus, if the operator enters the symbol rate, the application will immediately calcu-
late the bandwidth for information purposes, or vice versa. The calculated value
will be displayed in the process.
Note: If a bad format is chosen, the bandwidth cannot be calculated and the field
remains blank. An error message is displayed.

418 Chapter 5
5.5 - Operation
The following formula is applied:
Bandwidth = Symbol rate * (1 + Roll off)

where Roll off = 0.35 in QPSK convolution
Roll off = 0.26 in 8PSK or 16 QAM convolution

Chapter 5 419
5.5 - Operation
5.5.3.2 - Parameters linked to encoder control and signal content

In Figure 5.3, the right-hand area of the dialogue box is dedicated to encoder control
and the content of the transmitted signal. The button in the Components area
title is used to quickly modify the service-id parameter.
Figure 5.4: Service Id Editor
It displays two lists of available components (one list per encoder).

The content of the list depends on the software and hardware options installed on
each encoder.
Above each list, an alarm symbol appears in front of each encoder name. Its appea-
rance depends on alarm status:
• Green: no alarm,
• Orange or red flashing: alarms have occurred.
In the list, a check box in front of each item allows a component to be inserted into
the signal transmitted to the satellite. By clicking these boxes, the components are
inserted into, or removed from, the signal one by one.
If the Video bitrate automatic adjustment in the Transmission panel is checked,
each time a component is inserted into or removed from the signal, the application
recalculates the bit rate of the video components automatically to ensure optimum
use of the bandwidth. For systems with two encoders, the rate allocated to each
video component is always identical.
For advanced use, a button located under each list allows access to parameters of
the component selected in the list.
This screen can be used to modify the PID, profile or other advanced parameters.
The presentation of the parameters in these screens is identical to that of the
DBS 2930.
To change video parameters, the procedure is:
1. Select the component,

420 Chapter 5
5.5 - Operation
2. Click on the Edit Video parameters... button or double-click on the component,

3. The screen for the parameters of a video component (General panel) appears:
Figure 5.5: Video parameters (general panel)
The video rate cannot be set by the user if it is calculated automatically for each
change of transmitted components.

Chapter 5 421
5.5 - Operation
4. Click on the Advanced tab to edit the advanced parameters of a video component
(Advanced panel):
Figure 5.6: Video parameters (advanced panel)

422 Chapter 5
5.5 - Operation
5. Click on the VBI tab to edit the VBI parameters of a video component (VBI
panel):
Figure 5.7: Video parameters (VBI panel)

Chapter 5 423
5.5 - Operation
6. Click on the Helper Channel tab for the encoder to use any helper channel infor-
mation present or transmit the encoding decisions:
Figure 5.8: Video parameters (Helper Channel panel)
To change audio parameters, the procedure is:

1. Select the component,
2. Click on the Edit Audio parameters... button or double-click on the component,
3. The screen for the parameters of an audio component (General panel) appears:

424 Chapter 5
5.5 - Operation
Figure 5.9: Audio parameters (general panel)

Chapter 5 425
5.5 - Operation
4. Click on the Advanced tab to edit the advanced parameters of an audio component
(Advanced panel):
Figure 5.10: Audio parameters (advanced panel)

426 Chapter 5
5.5 - Operation
5.5.4 - Alarms panel
This window lists the current alarms on the devices. The list is refreshed approxi-
mately every 5 seconds.
The number of alarms features in the tab to the right of the page name. This saves
the operator opening the Alarms page to find out the status of the device.
When an alarm rises on a device, the application flashes in the Windows task bar to
warn the operator who does not work on the application.
Figure 5.11: Alarms panel
The Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge all the alarms in the list.
• Acknowledge box is not checked: the LED is flashing in the Alarm panel or in
the tasks bar,
• Acknowledge box is checked: the LED stops flashing.
At each modification in the Alarm list, the button is released.

Chapter 5 427
5.5 - Operation
5.5.5 - Scrambling panel
To use this panel, the appropriate scrambling option is required.
Figure 5.12: Scrambling panel
The operator can define a list of session words (SW) on the right of the panel and
associate each SW with a client name. This list is saved to the hard disk of the PC
and recovered each time the application is started up. Session words are limited to
six bytes and parity is fixed (even).
Three buttons located under the list are used to add, remove or edit a session word.
To edit the session word or the service client name, select the corresponding Client
Name and Session Word line in the right-hand area and click on Edit or double-
click on the line.
To add the session word or the service client name, select the corresponding Client
Name and Session Word line in the right-hand area then click on Add.

428 Chapter 5
5.5 - Operation
Figure 5.13: Session Word and Client Name
The left-hand area is used to enable or disable scrambling on each encoder and
select the session word. The session word is selected from the list using Pick
selected SW from list.

Chapter 5 429
5.5 - Operation
5.5.6 - Information panel
This panel displays the read-only information on the software and hardware options
of the encoders.
Figure 5.14: Information panel

430 Chapter 5
5.5 - Operation
5.5.7 - Preset panel
Figure 5.15: Preset panel
This panel is used to configure each encoder with the configurations saved in the
encoder memory, save configurations and delete backup configurations.
Two types of memory are defined for DBE 4110 encoders:
• the authorised read and write memories that can be programmed by the Operator
using the Fast_DSNG software.
• the authorised read-only memories that are programmed at the manufacturers.
They contain the standard predefined configurations. The contents of these
memories cannot be changed by the Operator.
A list is displayed for each encoder in which each line represents a memory
identified by a number or letter (1 to 8 for read and write memories; and A, B, and
C for read-only memories). Each line also contains the name of the archived
configuration and the memory status (Empty, Read only or Used). No name is
shown in the second column when a memory is empty.

Chapter 5 431
5.5 - Operation
Three buttons are also available to:

• copy the current encoder configuration onto the selected memory (Save button);
• activate the configuration from the selected memory (Recall button);
• delete the content of the selected memory (Clear button).
Note: the value of the parameters recognised by the factory set configurations A, B
and C are identical to those described in section 4.5.3.6 - Archived configurations.

432 Chapter 5
5.5 - Operation
5.5.8 - Dynamic behaviour
This section contains the software specification elements that are liable to change.
5.5.8.1 - No connection
On starting up the application, the software attempts to set up a control/command
link with the main encoder then with the second encoder.
As long as all connections (one or two depending on the configuration) are not set
up, the configuration parameters are not displayed.
As long as communications are not set up, the encoder parameters in the Transmis-
sion, Alarms, Scrambling and Information panels are masked.
5.5.8.2 - Setting up a connection

As soon as all the connections are set up, the software displays the current configu-
ration.
If the encoder does not know how manage the current configuration, it sends a
message and proposes another standard configuration.
• For a configuration with two encoders, the following tests are carried out:
- If the Main encoder does not feature the N41STSIN option, communications are
broken and a message is displayed;
- If the Main encoder features the N41STSIN option, the TS input configuration is
forced to allow all the services through.
• When an external signal is used on the TS input, all the services pass through.
Once the tests have been carried out, the encoder configuration is displayed on the
software screens.
Subsequently, the alarms are regularly requested from the device and displayed in
the Alarms panel.

Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting 433
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
6.1 - Device connection problems ............................................................ 436
6.2 - Inspecting the power supply fuse .................................................... 437
6.3 - Miscellaneous problems.................................................................... 438

6.3.1 - Fan life expectancy....................................................................... 438
6.3.2 - Front panel LCD blank.................................................................. 438
6.3.3 - Default analogue video input ........................................................ 438
6.3.4 - Autotest problem........................................................................... 438
6.3.5 - Recommendations when using the MSU 4440 decoder............... 439

434 Chapter 6
BLANK PAGE

Chapter 6 435
This chapter contains useful information concerning first level maintenance. It is

intended to help solve problems related to connection and mains fuse inspection.

436 Chapter 6
6.1 - Device connection problems
6.1 - DEVICE CONNECTION PROBLEMS
Connection problems are often difficult to solve as causes are numerous and varied.
A malfunction may be caused by the network being incorrectly set-up on the PC, a
wiring problem or damage to a non-responding device.
The aim of this section is to provide a procedure that can be followed to solve these
problems in a minimum of time.
When the DBE 4110 is signalled as not responding, proceed as follows:
1. Check that the DBE 4110 is operational and that the front panel is working, by
moving around the menus.
2. Check that the IP address assigned to the device on the PC in the {Equipment
Installation} application matches the one assigned to the device displayed on
the front panel in the Other/Tools/IP Address menu.
3. Check that the DBE 4110 responds to network prompts; use the Ping IP
address command in an MS-DOS window. If the device responds, skip the next
paragraph.
4. Check the value of the subnet mask in the network set-up panel on the PC; the
subnet mask identifies the part identifying the subnet in the IP address; like an
IP address it consists of 4 numbers separated by "."; if the device address is not
in the subnet, the device will not be accessible.
5. Check the cables with the ohmmeter; Ethernet cables are quite fragile and
connector crimping may be faulty.

Chapter 6 437
6.2 - Inspecting the power supply fuse
6.2 - INSPECTING THE POWER SUPPLY FUSE
If the "POWER" LED on the front panel is off, check the following in the order
specified:
1. Check that the ON/OFF switch is ON.
2. Check the mains power supply source.
3. Reset the mains switch to OFF and disconnect the power cord.
4. Open the fuse holder on the switch base.
Fuse holder
5. Measure the fuse value with an ohmmeter.

- If a fuse is faulty, contact the NEXTREAM Customer Service.
A faulty fuse indicates that the product is damaged. You are therefore not
advised to simply change the fuse.
Please have the product inspected by a qualified member of NEXTREAM
maintenance staff.
- If the fuse is not faulty, another fuse in the power supply drawer may be faulty. To
inspect this fuse, the unit requires dismounting and hence comes under a higher
maintenance level. The procedure is not described in this manual.

438 Chapter 6
6.3 - Miscellaneous problems
6.3 - MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS
6.3.1 - Fan life expectancy
The DBE 4110 has built in fans with a life expectancy of roughly 7 years at 30°C (6
years at 40°C). When your DBE 4110 reaches this age, fans will need to be
replaced; please, contact NEXTREAM After Sales Service.
6.3.2 - Front panel LCD blank
If the DBE 4110 is on and the front panel LCD is backlighted but does not show any
indication or shows only four rows of black blocks, check that the contrast is
properly set.
6.3.3 - Default analogue video input
In the case of a device fitted with a DPSN board, the choice analogue video input
PAL/SECAM (50Hz) or NTSC (60 Hz) should be available. If not, check that the
DPSN board has been declared present ("Other/Tools/Option/Hardware").
6.3.4 - Autotest problem
When a device cannot exit the autotest, try to clear the memory. To do this, switch
off and set the rotary switch (on the RSMAINT board, if present, if not, on the
SSEB board) to position 5. Switch on, wait 1 minute, switch off, return the rotary
switch to position 0, and switch on.
However, all the configurations (the current one and those saved) will be lost.

Chapter 6 439
6.3.5 - Recommendations when using the MSU 4440 decoder
Picture freeze:
• A PCR component must be generated.
• If "PSI OFF" decoder mode is used, check that the PCR PID is correct
(generally the video component PID).
• The recommended value of the V_PTS offset is 400 (menu "CHANNEL
#1/IRD CONFIG/V_PTS=400"). This value is mandatory as specified in the
decoder user manual.
Picture chroma incorrect, colours not stable:
• The 27 MHz clock generated by the decoder is jittering: its internal PLL is not
locked. Check that the PCR PID is correct (PID of another service present in
the input multiplex) or verify that the PCR is present.

440 Chapter 6
BLANK PAGE

Chapter 7 - Customer Service 441
Chapter 7
Customer Service
7.1 - EU Declaration of conformity............................................................ 443
7.2 - FCC Declaration of conformity ......................................................... 444
7.3 - Return your comments ...................................................................... 445
7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services........................................................ 446

442 Chapter 7
BLANK PAGE

Chapter 7 443
7.1 - EU Declaration of conformity
7.1 - EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

444 Chapter 7
7.2 - FCC Declaration of conformity
7.2 - FCC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Chapter 7 445
7.3 - Return your comments
7.3 - RETURN YOUR COMMENTS
All comments help us to improve our publications.

Do not hesitate to contact us:
NEXTREAM France
Département Marketing
Service Documentation
Rue du Clos-Courtel
35 517 CESSON-SEVIGNE - FRANCE
or by e-mail: philippe.thoumy@thomson.net
Please give the manual reference.
Reader name:
Company:
Address:
Phone:
Fax:
E-mail:

446 Chapter 7
7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services
7.4 - NEXTREAM CUSTOMER SERVICES
" For all inquiries regarding the procedure for returning equipment
for in-factory repairs and follow-up of repairs:
contact the Customer Logistics Service
• by telephone: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 82
• by fax: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 92
• by e-mail: cslogistics.nextream@thomson.net
• For all returns, please request an RMA (Return Material Authorisation) number
from the Customer Logistics Service. The shipment address (B or C) will be
confirmed and will depend on the product.
Address B (Brest) Address C (Cergy)
Nextream France Nextream France
Technopole Brest-Iroise Service Logistique Clients
295 avenue Alexis de Rochon 17 rue du Petit Albi
29280 PLOUZANE 95801 CERGY PONTOISE
FRANCE FRANCE
• Equipment should be returned in its original box with its return authorisation
form (see following page). If you no longer have the packaging, the faulty device
must be protected against shocks during transportation. The Customer Logistics
Service examines packaging on arrival and can refuse to carry out repairs if the
packaging has been visibly damaged during transportation and this has led to
further damage in addition to the fault originally noted.
• Unless specifically agreed, cost and risks for return shipment of equipment are
borne by the customer. Following repairs, return shipment costs will be borne by
Nextream France.
• The company may not be held liable for any delay resulting from failure to
observe the return procedure.

Chapter 7 447
" For technical inquiries:

The technical support service will answer any technical inquiries from customers
not covered by a specific support agreement (SLA - Service Level Agreement):
• by telephone: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 72
(from 9am to 6pm, French time, Monday to Friday, excl. business holidays)
Answerphone available at all other times.
• by fax: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 92
• by e-mail: cssupport.nextream@thomson.net
This period can be extended using an SLA.
" To contact the Customer Services Department:

For information on additional services or a support agreement to meet your
requirements, please contact your usual sales representative or the Customer
Services Department:
• by telephone: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 72
• by fax: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 92
• by e-mail: csservices.nextream@thomson.net
An offer of services will be made depending on your requirements in terms of:
• Service Level Agreements: TOPAZ, RUBY, EMERALD and DIAMOND
levels;
• In-factory and on-site training;
• Spares;
• Technical documentation;
• Software updates;
• Local support;
• Specific agreement.

448 Chapter 7
This page can be duplicated for the return. Cette page peut être copiée pour faciliter le retour.
RETURN AUTHORISATION FORM

AUTORISATION DE RETOUR D'EQUIPEMENT
Reference number for the RMA:

Numéro d'autorisation de retour:
obtained from the Customer Logistic Service + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 82
à obtenir auprès du service logistique clients + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 82
cslogistics.nextream@thomson.net
Equipt:
Name: date:
Fault description in the device returned:

Merci d'indiquer le défaut de l'équipement:
Ship to (Expédier à): Address B or(ou) Address C :
Adresse B (Brest) Adresse C (Cergy)

Nextream France Nextream France
Technopole Brest-Iroise Service Logistique Clients
295 Av Alexis de Rochon 17 rue du Petit Albi
29280 PLOUZANE 95801 Cergy Pontoise
FRANCE FRANCE
Important notices:
Please clearly mark the return authorisation number on the packaging.
Except for special agreement, cost and risks for return shipment of the device are
borne by the Customer.
Nextream France cannot be held responsible if return procedure is not followed.
Remarques importantes :
Merci de noter clairement le numéro d'autorisation de retour sur l'emballage.
Le transport pour le retour des équipements est à la charge et aux risques du Client.
Nextream France ne peut être tenue pour responsable de tout délai suite au non-
respect de la procédure de retour.

Chapter 8 - Abbreviations and Acroynms 449
Chapter 8
Abbreviations and Acroynms
Abbreviations and acronyms ................................................................... 451

450 Chapter 8
BLANK PAGE

Chapter 8 451
Abbreviations and acronyms
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
AAL1: ATM Adaptation Layer 1

AAL5: ATM Adaptation Layer 5
AC: Alternating current
AC3: Dolby 5+1 Surround encoding
A/D: Analogue to Digital
ADC: Analogue to Digital Converter
AES/EBU: Audio Engineering Society / European Broadcasting Union
AMuSE: Audio Multi Standard Encoder
API: Application Programming Interface
ASI: Asynchronous Serial Interface
ASIC: Application Specific Integrated Circuit
ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AVA: Audio and Video Acquisition
BAT: Bouquet Association Table
BCS: Broadcast Control System
BIST: Built In Self Test
BPSK: Binary Phase Shift Keying
B.W.: Bandwidth
CAC: Conditional Access Control
CAT: Control Access Table
CATV: CAble TeleVision
CBR: Constant Bit Rate
CDV: Compressed Digital Video
CLP: Cell Loss Priority
CPCS: Common Point Convergence Sublayer
CPU: Central Processing Unit
CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check
CS: Convergence Sublayer
CW: Control Word
DBE: Digital Broadcast Encoder
dBFS: Full Scale decibel
DC: Direct current
DDS: Direct Digital Synthesis
DES: Data Encryption Standard

452 Chapter 8
DID: Data Identifier

DPSN: Décodeur Pal Secam Ntsc (Pal Secam Ntsc decoder)
DSNG: Digital SNG
DSP: Digital Signal Processor
DSS: Digital Satellite System
DVB: Digital Video Broacasting
DVD: Digital Versatile Disc
DVITC: Digital Vertical Interval Time Code
ECM: Entitlement Control Message
EDH: Error Detection and Handling
EEC: European Economic Community
EIT: Event Information Table
EMC: Electromagnetic compatibility
EMM: Entitlement Management Message
EPG: Electronic Program Guide
EPROM: Erasable Program Only Memory
ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute
FBI: Field Blanking Interval
FCP: Field Coding Parameters
FDM: Frequency Domain Multiplexing
FEC: Forward Error Correction
FPGA: Field Programmable Gate Array
GOP: Group Of Pictures
GFC: Generic Flow Control
GND: Ground
GPS: Global Positioning System
HDTV: High Definition TeleVision
HEC: Header Error Control
IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IF: Intermediate Frequency
IRD: Integrated Receiver Decoder
ISB: Intermediary Satellite Bandwidth
ISO/IEC: International Standard Organisation / International Electrical Commis-
sion
ISOG: International Satellite Operators Group
ITU: International Telecommunications Union
JTAG: Joint Test Action Group

Chapter 8 453
LBI: Line Blanking Interval

LCD: Liquid Crystal Display
LED: Light Emitting Diode
LTW: Legal Time Window
LVDS: Low Voltage Differential Signalling
MCPC: Multiple Channel Per Carrier
MDT: Multiplex Diagnostic Table
MMDS: Microwave Multipoint Distribution System
MP@ML: Main Profile / Main Level
MPEG: Motion Picture Expert Group
MPTS: Multiple Program Transport Stream
MSB: Most Significant Bit
MTBF: Mean Time Between Failures
MUX: multiplexer
MXX: multiplexer ASIC / DVB / DSS scrambler
NIT: Network Identification Table
NTSC: National Television System Community
OAM: Operation Administration And Maintenance
PAL: Phase Alternative Line
PAT: Program Association Table
PC: Personal Computer
PCMCIA: Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
PCR: Program Clock Reference
PDH: Pleisiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PES: Packetised Elementary Stream
PID: Packet Identifier
PL: Physical Layer
PLE: Physical Layer Electrical
PLL: Phase Locked Loop
PLO: Physical Layer Optical
PMD: Physical Medium Dependent
PMT: Program Map Table
P/N: Part number
PSI: Program Specific Information
PSK: Phase Shift Keying
PTI: Payload Type Indicator
PTS: Presentation Time Stamp

454 Chapter 8
QAM: Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

QCIF: Quarter Common Interchange Format
QPSK: Quaternary Phase Shift Keying
RAM: Random Access Memory
R.I.: Revision Index
RMS: Root Mean Square
RS: Reed Solomon
SAM: Scrambling Authorization Module
SAR: Segmentation And Reassembly
SAV: Start of Active Video
SCPC: Single Channel Per Carrier
SDH: Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDI: Serial Digital Interface
SDT: Service Description Table
SECAM: Sequentiel à Mémoire
SI: Service Information
SID: Source Identifier
SIF: Source Input Format
SIS: Sound In Sync
SMPTE: Society of Moving Picture and Television Engineers
S/N.: Signal / Noise ratio
SNG: Satellite News Gathering
SNMP: System and Network Management Protocol
SPTS: Single Program Transport Stream
SRAM: Static Random Access Memory
SSEB: Single Service Encoder Board
TBC: Time Base Corrector
TBD: To be defined
TC: Transmission Convergence
TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
TCXO: Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator
TDT: Time and Date Table
TE: 5.08 mm
TOT: Time Offset Table
TS: Transport Stream
TSDT: Transport Stream Description Table

Chapter 8 455
U: 44.54 mm
UNI: User Network Interface
UTC: Universal Time Code
UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair
VBI: Vertical Blanking Interval
VBR: Variable Bit Rate
VBV: Video Buffering Verifier
VCI: Virtual Channel Identifier
VCR: Video Cassette Recorder
VITC: Vertical Interval Time Code
VPI: Virtual Path Identifier
VPS: Video Programming System
WSS: Wide Screen Signalling

456 Chapter 8
BLANK PAGE


Nextream - 4110-20

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Nextream - 4110-20

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Head Office

17, rue du Petit Albi

DBE 4110 DSNG ENCODER

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Important Safety Precautions

Do Not Operate in To avoid electric shock, do not operate this product

47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110

Do Not Operate in To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this

Maintenance To avoid electric shock, disconnect the mains power

Product Damage Precautions

Fitting If installing the device in a rack, observe the

Dusty atmosphere As the device features no air filter, it must be

Provide Proper Provide proper ventilation to prevent product

Replacing components Only use components from or approved by

THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01

Replacement of RAM This product includes a non volatile RAM with an

Retain Original If equipment is returned to the Customer Service

47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110

THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01

USING THE MANUAL

Chapter 1 "Specifications" provides technical specifications and detailed

Chapter 2 "Installation" explains the operations necessary on initial start up:

Chapter 3 "Front Panel Operation" presents the local supervision and

Chapter 4 "PC operation - Control & Command software" gives a description

Chapter 5 "PC operation - Fast_DSNG software" gives a description of the

Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting" gives useful basic maintenance information which

Chapter 7 "Customer Service" contains important contact information should

Chapter 8 "Abbreviations and Acroynms" contains a list of the principal

47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110

THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01

General Safety Instructions ................................................................................iii

Using the manual ................................................................................................vii

1.1 - Encoding system overview .............................................................................. 3

1.2 - DBE 4110 overview............................................................................................ 4

1.3 - Sales references ................................................................................................ 6

1.4 - Specifications .................................................................................................... 8

47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110

1.4.2.9 - Int. modulator (option).................................................................... 35

2.1 - Encoder installation ........................................................................................ 50

2.2 - Board connections.......................................................................................... 57

2.3 - Switching on the device ................................................................................. 80

2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input ........................................ 81

2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software..................................................................... 84

THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01

2.5.2.3 - Setup procedure ............................................................................ 85

2.6 - Installing optional boards............................................................................... 97

2.7 - Installing software options ............................................................................. 99

3.1 - Operating principle........................................................................................ 103

3.2 - Front panel overview..................................................................................... 104

3.3 - Welcome and main screens ......................................................................... 108

3.4 - Ergonomy....................................................................................................... 110

3.5 - External modulator connection.................................................................... 113

3.6 - Menu tree........................................................................................................ 114

3.7 - Sections associated with the menu............................................................. 117

3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens...................................... 118

47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110

3.8.6 - ENCODING screen ................................................................................. 131

4.1 - Ergonomic aspects ....................................................................................... 155

4.2 - Running software .......................................................................................... 168

4.3 - {Equipment Interface} application ............................................................... 170

4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application ........................................................... 173

THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01

4.4.4.2 - Validating changes to device installation ..................................... 180